2010 Infiniti g37 3

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 496

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM


SECTION AV B

E
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAM- Description ...............................................................33 F
ERA DTC Logic ................................................................33

BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 11 U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 34


G
Description ...............................................................34
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........11 DTC Logic ................................................................34
Work Flow ............................................................... 11
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 35 H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 13 Description ...............................................................35
DTC Logic ................................................................35
MULTI AV SYSTEM ...........................................13 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................35 I
System Diagram ...................................................... 13
System Description ................................................. 13 U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................. 37
Component Parts Location ...................................... 15 Description ...............................................................37
Component Description ........................................... 16 DTC Logic ................................................................37 J
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................37
AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................17
System Diagram ...................................................... 17 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 39
K
System Description ................................................. 17 Description ...............................................................39
Component Parts Location ...................................... 18
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 40
Component Description ........................................... 18
L
AV CONTROL UNIT ..................................................40
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)....20 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ...........40
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 20
CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 27 DISPLAY UNIT ...........................................................40 M
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................40
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 30
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .......................................41
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .............................30 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce- AV
Description .............................................................. 30 dure .........................................................................41
DTC Logic ............................................................... 30
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 30 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ......................................42 O
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce-
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ..........................31 dure .........................................................................42
Description .............................................................. 31
DTC Logic ............................................................... 31 RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 43 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 31 Description ...............................................................43
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................43
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ...............................32
Description .............................................................. 32 RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 44
DTC Logic ............................................................... 32 Description ...............................................................44
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................44
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ...............................33

Revision: 2009 November AV-1 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 45 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 83
Description .............................................................. 45
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ..................... 83
Symptom Table ....................................................... 83
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...... 46
Description .............................................................. 46 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 85
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46 Description .............................................................. 85

RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 47 PRECAUTION ............................................ 87


Description .............................................................. 47
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 87
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG- (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................... 48 SIONER" ................................................................. 87
Description .............................................................. 48 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ............................ 87
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48 Precaution for Harness Repair ................................ 87

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL PREPARATION .......................................... 89


CIRCUIT ............................................................. 49
Description .............................................................. 49
PREPARATION ................................................. 89
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 89
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......................... 50 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 90


Description .............................................................. 50 AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 90
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50 Exploded View ........................................................ 90
CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................... 52 Removal and Installation ......................................... 90
Description .............................................................. 52 DISPLAY UNIT .................................................. 91
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52 Exploded View ........................................................ 91
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ........ 53 Removal and Installation ......................................... 91
Description .............................................................. 53 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 92
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 Exploded View ........................................................ 92
Component Inspection ............................................ 53 Removal and Installation ......................................... 92
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ........ 55 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 93
Description .............................................................. 55 Exploded View ........................................................ 93
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 55 Removal and Installation ......................................... 93
Component Inspection ............................................ 55
TWEETER .......................................................... 94
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT ... 57 Exploded View ........................................................ 94
Description .............................................................. 57
Removal and Installation ......................................... 94
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57
Component Inspection ............................................ 57 ANTENNA AMP. ................................................ 95
Exploded View ........................................................ 95
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 59 Removal and Installation ......................................... 95
AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 59 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .............................. 96
Reference Value ..................................................... 59 Exploded View ........................................................ 96
DTC Index .............................................................. 65 Removal and Installation ......................................... 96
DISPLAY UNIT .................................................. 66 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........................ 97
Reference Value ..................................................... 66 Exploded View ........................................................ 97
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .............................. 69 Removal and Installation ......................................... 97
Reference Value ..................................................... 69 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .............................. 98
Exploded View ........................................................ 98
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 71
Removal and Installation ......................................... 98
BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAM-
PRESET SWITCH .............................................. 99
ERA .................................................................... 71 Exploded View ........................................................ 99
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 71
Removal and Installation ......................................... 99

Revision: 2009 November AV-2 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 100 BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA .. 141
Exploded View ...................................................... 100 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 141 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 100
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 157
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS .............................. 101
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 157 B
Exploded View ...................................................... 101
Removal and Installation ....................................... 101 Work Flow .............................................................. 157

ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 102 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING C


Feeder Layout ....................................................... 102 (AV CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 159
BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA Description ............................................................. 159
Work Procedure ..................................................... 159
D
PRECAUTION ............................................ 103
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...... 160
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 103 Description ............................................................. 160
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Work Procedure ..................................................... 160 E
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Configuration List ................................................... 160
SIONER" ............................................................... 103
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 103 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 162
F
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 103
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 162
PREPARATION ......................................... 105 Description ............................................................. 162
DTC Logic .............................................................. 162 G
PREPARATION ................................................ 105 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 162
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 105
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 163
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 106 DTC Logic .............................................................. 163

COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 106 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 164


Component Parts Location .................................... 106 DTC Logic .............................................................. 164 I
Component Description ......................................... 107
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 165
SYSTEM ........................................................... 109 DTC Logic .............................................................. 165
J
MULTI AV SYSTEM ................................................ 109 U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 166
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram ................ 109 DTC Logic .............................................................. 166
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description ............ 109 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166 K
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 112 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 167
Description ............................................................ 112 DTC Logic .............................................................. 167
On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 112 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 L
CONSULT - III Function ........................................ 121
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................ 169
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT).. 124 DTC Logic .............................................................. 169
M
On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 124 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 126 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 171
Description ............................................................. 171 AV
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 126
Reference Value ................................................... 126 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 172
DTC Index ............................................................. 132 DTC Logic .............................................................. 172
O
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 134 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 173
Reference Value ................................................... 134
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 173
P
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 137 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 173
Reference Value ................................................... 137
DISPLAY UNIT ......................................................... 173
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 139 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 173
Reference Value ................................................... 139 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 174
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce-
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 141
dure ....................................................................... 174

Revision: 2009 November AV-3 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT ...............................................175 STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 194
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........175 Description ............................................................ 194
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 194
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 176 Component Inspection .......................................... 194
Description .............................................................176
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................176 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 196
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 177 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 196
Description .............................................................177 Symptom Table ..................................................... 196
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................177
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 200
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 178 Description ............................................................ 200
Description .............................................................178
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................178 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 202
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 179 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 202
Description .............................................................179 Exploded View ...................................................... 202
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................179 Removal and Installation ....................................... 202

RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 180 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 203
Description .............................................................180 Exploded View ...................................................... 203
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................180 Removal and Installation ....................................... 203

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 181 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 204
Description .............................................................181 Exploded View ...................................................... 204
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................181 Removal and Installation ....................................... 204

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 183 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 205
Description .............................................................183 Exploded View ...................................................... 205
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................183 Removal and Installation ....................................... 205

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG- TWEETER ......................................................... 206


NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 184 Exploded View ...................................................... 206
Description .............................................................184 Removal and Installation ....................................... 206
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................184
ANTENNA AMP. ............................................... 207
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL Exploded View ...................................................... 207
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 185 Removal and Installation ....................................... 207
Description .............................................................185
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................185
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 208
Exploded View ...................................................... 208
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 186 Removal and Installation ....................................... 208
Description .............................................................186
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................186
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 209
Exploded View ...................................................... 209
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 187 Removal and Installation ....................................... 209
Description .............................................................187
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................187
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 210
Exploded View ...................................................... 210
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......................... 189 Removal and Installation ....................................... 210
Description .............................................................189
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................189
PRESET SWITCH ............................................. 211
Exploded View ...................................................... 211
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ...... 190 Removal and Installation ....................................... 211
Description .............................................................190
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................190
STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 212
Component Inspection ...........................................190 Exploded View ...................................................... 212
Removal and Installation ....................................... 212
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ...... 192
Description .............................................................192
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 213
Exploded View ...................................................... 213
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................192
Removal and Installation ....................................... 213
Component Inspection ...........................................192

Revision: 2009 November AV-4 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE ................................................. 214 Reference Value .................................................... 244
Exploded View ...................................................... 214 DTC Index ............................................................. 250 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 214
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 252
TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 215 Reference Value .................................................... 252
B
Exploded View ...................................................... 215
Removal and Installation ....................................... 215 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 255
Reference Value .................................................... 255
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 216 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 216 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ........................... 258
Removal and Installation ....................................... 216 Reference Value .................................................... 258

REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 217 TEL ADAPTER UNIT ...................................... 260 D
Exploded View ...................................................... 217 Reference Value .................................................... 260
Removal and Installation ....................................... 217
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 262
Adjustment ............................................................ 217 E
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION ......... 262
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .......................... 219
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 262
Exploded View ...................................................... 219
F
Removal and Installation ....................................... 219 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 281
ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 220 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 281
Feeder Layout ....................................................... 220 Work Flow .............................................................. 281 G
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
PRECAUTION ............................................ 221 (AV CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 283 H
Description ............................................................. 283
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 221 Work Procedure ..................................................... 283
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...... 284 I
SIONER" ............................................................... 221 Description ............................................................. 284
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 221 Work Procedure ..................................................... 284
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 221 Configuration List ................................................... 284 J
PREPARATION ......................................... 223 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 286
PREPARATION ................................................ 223 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 286 K
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 223 Description ............................................................. 286
DTC Logic .............................................................. 286
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 224 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 286 L
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 224 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 287
Component Parts Location .................................... 224 DTC Logic .............................................................. 287
Component Description ......................................... 225 M
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 288
SYSTEM ........................................................... 227 DTC Logic .............................................................. 288
MULTI AV SYSTEM ................................................ 227 AV
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 289
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram ................ 227
DTC Logic .............................................................. 289
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description ............ 227
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 290 O
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 230 DTC Logic .............................................................. 290
Description ............................................................ 230
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 290
On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 230
CONSULT - III Function ........................................ 239 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 291 P
DTC Logic .............................................................. 291
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT).. 242 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 291
On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 242
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................ 293
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 244 DTC Logic .............................................................. 293
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 244 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 293

Revision: 2009 November AV-5 2010 G37 Sedan


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 295 Description ............................................................ 311
Description .............................................................295 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 311

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 296 MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 312
DTC Logic ..............................................................296 Description ............................................................ 312
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 312
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 297
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 313
AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................297 Description ............................................................ 313
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..........297 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 313
DISPLAY UNIT .........................................................297 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT .......................... 315
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..................297 Description ............................................................ 315
BOSE AMP. ..............................................................298 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 315
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ......................298 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 316
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ....................................299 Description ............................................................ 316
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 316
dure .......................................................................299 Component Inspection .......................................... 316

TEL ADAPTER UNIT ...............................................299 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 318
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........299 Description ............................................................ 318
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 318
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 301 Component Inspection .......................................... 318
Description .............................................................301
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................301 STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 320
Description ............................................................ 320
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 302 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 320
Description .............................................................302 Component Inspection .......................................... 320
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................302
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 322
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 303
Description .............................................................303 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 322
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................303 Symptom Table ..................................................... 322

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 304 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 326
Description .............................................................304 Description ............................................................ 326
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................304
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 328
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 305
Description .............................................................305 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 328
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................305 Exploded View ...................................................... 328
Removal and Installation ....................................... 328
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 306
Description .............................................................306 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 329
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................306 Exploded View ...................................................... 329
Removal and Installation ....................................... 329
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 308
Description .............................................................308 FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER ............................ 330
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................308 Exploded View ...................................................... 330
Removal and Installation ....................................... 330
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 309 FRONT DOOR WOOFER ................................. 331
Description .............................................................309 Exploded View ...................................................... 331
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................309 Removal and Installation ....................................... 331

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 332


CIRCUIT ........................................................... 310 Exploded View ...................................................... 332
Description .............................................................310 Removal and Installation ....................................... 332
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................310 TWEETER ......................................................... 333
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 311 Exploded View ...................................................... 333
Removal and Installation ....................................... 333

Revision: 2009 November AV-6 2010 G37 Sedan


CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 334 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 350
Exploded View ...................................................... 334 Exploded View ....................................................... 350 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 334 Removal and Installation ....................................... 350

REAR WOOFER ............................................... 335 ANTENNA FEEDER ........................................ 351


B
Exploded View ...................................................... 335 Feeder Layout ....................................................... 351
Removal and Installation ....................................... 335 BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 336 PRECAUTION ............................................ 352 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 336
Removal and Installation ....................................... 336 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 352
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System D
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 337 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Exploded View ...................................................... 337 SIONER" ............................................................... 352
Removal and Installation ....................................... 337 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 352
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 352 E
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 338
Exploded View ...................................................... 338 PREPARATION ......................................... 354
Removal and Installation ....................................... 338
F
PREPARATION ............................................... 354
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 339 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 354
Exploded View ...................................................... 339
Removal and Installation ....................................... 339 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 355 G
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 340 COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 355
Exploded View ...................................................... 340 Component Parts Location .................................... 355
Removal and Installation ....................................... 340 H
Component Description ......................................... 356
PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 341 SYSTEM .......................................................... 358
Exploded View ...................................................... 341 I
Removal and Installation ....................................... 341 MULTI AV SYSTEM ................................................. 358
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram ................. 358
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 342 MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description ............ 358
Exploded View ...................................................... 342 MULTI AV SYSTEM : Fail-Safe ............................. 363 J
Removal and Installation ....................................... 342
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 364
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 343 Description ............................................................. 364 K
Exploded View ...................................................... 343 On Board Diagnosis Function ................................ 364
Removal and Installation ....................................... 343 CONSULT - III Function ........................................ 376
MICROPHONE ................................................. 344 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 380 L
Exploded View ...................................................... 344
Removal and Installation ....................................... 344 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 380
Reference Value .................................................... 380 M
TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 345 Fail-Safe ................................................................ 384
Exploded View ...................................................... 345 DTC Index ............................................................. 385
Removal and Installation ....................................... 345
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 387 AV
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 346 Reference Value .................................................... 387
Exploded View ...................................................... 346
Removal and Installation ....................................... 346 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 389 O
Reference Value .................................................... 389
REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 347
Exploded View ...................................................... 347 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 392
Removal and Installation ....................................... 347 P
Adjustment ............................................................ 347 BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION ................ 392
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 392
SONAR CONTROL UNIT ................................. 349
Exploded View ...................................................... 349 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 409
Removal and Installation ....................................... 349
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 409
Work Flow .............................................................. 409

Revision: 2009 November AV-7 2010 G37 Sedan


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 427
(AV CONTROL UNIT) ...................................... 411 DTC Logic ............................................................. 427
Description .............................................................411 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 427
Work Procedure .....................................................411
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 428
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...... 412 DTC Logic ............................................................. 428
Description .............................................................412 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 428
Work Procedure .....................................................412
Configuration List ...................................................412 U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 429
DTC Logic ............................................................. 429
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 414 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 429

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 414 U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 430
Description .............................................................414 DTC Logic ............................................................. 430
DTC Logic ..............................................................414 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................414
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 431
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 415 DTC Logic ............................................................. 431
DTC Logic ..............................................................415 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 431

U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 416 U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 432
DTC Logic ..............................................................416 DTC Logic ............................................................. 432

U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 417 U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 433
DTC Logic ..............................................................417 DTC Logic ............................................................. 433
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 433
U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 418
DTC Logic ..............................................................418 U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 434
DTC Logic ............................................................. 434
U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 419
Description .............................................................419 U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 435
DTC Logic ..............................................................419 DTC Logic ............................................................. 435
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................419
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 436
U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 420 DTC Logic ............................................................. 436
Description .............................................................420 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 436
DTC Logic ..............................................................420
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................420
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 437
DTC Logic ............................................................. 437
U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 421
Description .............................................................421
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 438
DTC Logic ..............................................................421 DTC Logic ............................................................. 438
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................421 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 438

U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 422 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 439
DTC Logic ............................................................. 439
Description .............................................................422
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 439
DTC Logic ..............................................................422
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................422 U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 441
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 423 DTC Logic ............................................................. 441
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 441
DTC Logic ..............................................................423

U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 424 U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ............ 442
DTC Logic ............................................................. 442
DTC Logic ..............................................................424
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 442
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 425
DTC Logic ..............................................................425
U1263 USB ....................................................... 443
DTC Logic ............................................................. 443
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................425
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 443
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 426
DTC Logic ..............................................................426
U1264 ANTENNA AMP. ................................... 444
DTC Logic ............................................................. 444
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................426
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 444

Revision: 2009 November AV-8 2010 G37 Sedan


U1265 BOSE AMP. .......................................... 445 Symptom Table ..................................................... 464
DTC Logic ............................................................. 445 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 445 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 468
Description ............................................................. 468
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 446
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 474 B
Description ............................................................ 446

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 447 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 474


DTC Logic ............................................................. 447 Exploded View ....................................................... 474 C
Removal and Installation ....................................... 474
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 448
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 475
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 448 Exploded View ....................................................... 475 D
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 448 Removal and Installation ....................................... 475
DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 448 FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER .......................... 476
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 448 E
Exploded View ....................................................... 476
Removal and Installation ....................................... 476
BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 449
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 449 FRONT DOOR WOOFER ............................... 477 F
Exploded View ....................................................... 477
RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........ 450
Removal and Installation ....................................... 477
Description ............................................................ 450
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 450 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 478 G
Exploded View ....................................................... 478
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 451
Removal and Installation ....................................... 478
Description ............................................................ 451 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 451 TWEETER ....................................................... 479
Exploded View ....................................................... 479
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 452
Removal and Installation ....................................... 479
Description ............................................................ 452 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 452 CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 480
Exploded View ....................................................... 480
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 453
Removal and Installation ....................................... 480 J
Description ............................................................ 453
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 453 REAR WOOFER ............................................. 481
Exploded View ....................................................... 481
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 454 K
Removal and Installation ....................................... 481
Description ............................................................ 454
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 454 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 482
Exploded View ....................................................... 482 L
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 456
Removal and Installation ....................................... 482
Description ............................................................ 456
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 456 ANTENNA AMP. ............................................. 483
Exploded View ....................................................... 483 M
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 458
Removal and Installation ....................................... 483
Description ............................................................ 458
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 458 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ...................... 484 AV
Component Inspection .......................................... 458 Exploded View ....................................................... 484
Removal and Installation ....................................... 484
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 460
Description ............................................................ 460 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 485 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 460 Exploded View ....................................................... 485
Component Inspection .......................................... 460 Removal and Installation ....................................... 485
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 462 P
PRESET SWITCH ........................................... 486
Description ............................................................ 462 Exploded View ....................................................... 486
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 462 Removal and Installation ....................................... 486
Component Inspection .......................................... 462
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 487
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 464 Exploded View ....................................................... 487
Removal and Installation ....................................... 487
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 464

Revision: 2009 November AV-9 2010 G37 Sedan


USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 488 Exploded View ...................................................... 492
Exploded View .......................................................488 Removal and Installation ....................................... 492
Removal and Installation .......................................488 Adjustment ............................................................ 492

MICROPHONE ................................................. 489 SONAR CONTROL UNIT ................................. 494


Exploded View .......................................................489 Exploded View ...................................................... 494
Removal and Installation .......................................489 Removal and Installation ....................................... 494

GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 490 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .......................... 495


Exploded View .......................................................490 Exploded View ...................................................... 495
Removal and Installation .......................................490 Removal and Installation ....................................... 495
Feeder Layout .......................................................491
ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 496
REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 492 Feeder Layout ....................................................... 496

Revision: 2009 November AV-10 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005621176
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".


• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-65, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-83, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: 2009 November AV-11 2010 G37 Sedan
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-65, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-83, "Symptom Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2009 November AV-12 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005621177
B

JPNIA0403GB

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION K
SWITCH virtually.
System Description INFOID:0000000005621178
L
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

System name System explanation M


AUDIO SYSTEM AV-17, "System Description"
• Indicates the status of audio, climate control system, fuel econ-
omy and maintenance. AV
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM • AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM,
unified meter and A/C amp and BCM.
O
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM Refer to “SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM” shown below.
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM Refer to “AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM” shown below.
• AV control unit functions by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures P
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Trans-
mitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting
and receives the response signal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-13 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• AV control unit is connected with display and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of
display and display control and receives the response signal from front display. Also, it is connected with sat-
ellite radio by serial communication, and it transmits the operating signal and receives the display signal.
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis.
• CONSULT-III self-diagnosis: refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
• On board self-diagnosis: refer to AV-20, "Diagnosis Description".
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM
• Satellite radio tuner is controlled by communication signal and request signal with AV control unit.
• Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna and transmitted to AV control unit. AV control
unit is output the audio signal (satellite radio) to each speaker.

JSNIA0206GB

AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM


• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks.
• Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits
operation signal to AV control unit with communication.

JSNIA0207GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-14 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005621179

JSNIA0174ZZ
J
1. Tweeter LH 2. Front door speaker LH 3. Rear door speaker LH
4. Antenna amp. 5. Satellite radio tuner 6. Rear door speaker RH
7. Satellite radio antenna 8. Auxiliary input jacks 9. Front door speaker RH
K
10. Tweeter RH 11. Display unit 12. Steering switch
13. Preset switch 14. AV control unit 15. Multifunction switch
L
A. Within rear pillar finisher LH B. Rear parcel shelf lower part (left side)

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-15 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Component Description INFOID:0000000005621180

Part name Description


• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each con-
trol unit by communication. It operates each system according to communi-
cation signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communi-
cation to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con-
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB
DISPLAY UNIT synchronizing).
• Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the AV control unit.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
TWEETER
• Outputs high range sound.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and
auxiliary input operations are integrated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
• Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted
to AV control unit via AV communication.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air
conditioner operations are integrated.
PRESET SWITCH • Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is trans-
mitted to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• The operation of Audio, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
display, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV
ANTENNA AMP. control unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to the AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communi-
cation signal and request signal).
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Receives the satellite radio signal and outputs it to the satellite radio tuner.

Revision: 2009 November AV-16 2010 G37 Sedan


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000005621181

JSNIA0208GB F

System Description INFOID:0000000005621182

G
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function can be operated with the multifunc-
tion switch, preset switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to the display.
H
Function
AM/FM radio
CD I

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Operating Signal J
Operation of the audio system can be performed with the multifunction switch, preset switch or steering
switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction K
switch or preset switch. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
L
Screen Display
• The display switching of the screen is performed with the communication signal between the display and the
AV control unit. M
• The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB signal, RGB area signal and RGB
image synchronizing signal.
AM/FM Radio Mode AV
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV
control unit. AV control unit outputs the audio signal to each speaker.
O
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs the audio signal to each speaker when inserting the CD to AV control unit.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-17 2010 G37 Sedan


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005621183

JSNIA0174ZZ

1. Tweeter LH 2. Front door speaker LH 3. Rear door speaker LH


4. Antenna amp. 5. Satellite radio tuner 6. Rear door speaker RH
7. Satellite radio antenna 8. Auxiliary input jacks 9. Front door speaker RH
10. Tweeter RH 11. Display unit 12. Steering switch
13. Preset switch 14. AV control unit 15. Multifunction switch
A. Within rear pillar finisher LH B. Rear parcel shelf lower part (left side)

Component Description INFOID:0000000005621184

Part name Description


• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Outputs the audio signal from each function to each speaker.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
TWEETER
• Outputs high range sound.
• Each audio operation can be operated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted
to AV control unit via AV communication.

Revision: 2009 November AV-18 2010 G37 Sedan


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Part name Description
A
• Each audio and air conditioner operation can be operated.
• Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is trans-
PRESET SWITCH
mitted to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire B
• Each audio operation can be operated.
STEERING SWITCH
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV C
ANTENNA AMP. control unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-19 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005621185

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION


The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. The buzzer
sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
CAUTION:
The hazard switch and CD eject switch cannot be checked.

JSNIA0136GB

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode


Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting actions generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make
judgment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self-Diagnosis
• Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.

Revision: 2009 November AV-20 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Mode Description
A
The confirmations of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and
Display Diagnosis
shading of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals B
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
C
Confirmation/ The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Adjustment Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
D
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
E
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.

STARTING PROCEDURE F

1. Start the engine.


2. Turn the audio system OFF. G
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
H
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “BACK” button.

J
JSNIA0137GB

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the


K
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.

JSNIA0138GB
AV
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self-diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self- O
diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
P

JSNIA0139GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-21 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.

Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green JSNIA0209GB

NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV con-
trol unit internal error.
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > gray.
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen.

JSNIA0141GB

Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode


• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.

JSNIA0210GB

NOTE:
On board self-diagnosis cannot be started when an error occurs on the dotted-line part above.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart

Revision: 2009 November AV-22 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Possible malfunction location / Action A


Area with yellow connection lines Description
to take

C
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace the AV control unit.

JSNIA0211GB

“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit E


malfunction”

• Malfunction is detected in communi-


cation circuit between AV control unit
and display unit. Communication circuit between AV
G
• Malfunction is detected in communi- control unit and display unit.
cation signal between AV control unit
and display unit. H

JPNIA0464GB
I
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
and ground circuit malfunction is de-
tected.
• Malfunction is detected in communi- • Satellite radio tuner power supply J
cation circuits between AV control and ground.
unit and satellite radio tuner. • Communication circuit between AV
• Malfunction is detected in communi- control unit and satellite radio tuner.
cation signal between AV control unit • Request signal circuit between AV
K
and satellite radio tuner. control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• Malfunction is detected in request
signal circuit between AV control unit L
JSNIA0212GB
and satellite radio tuner.

CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
M
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Inspection & Adjustment Mode”
AV
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “RETURN” switch to return to the initial Inspection & Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
O

JSNIA0147GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-23 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Display Diagnosis

JSNIA0688GB

The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected.

R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint


G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

JSNIA0149GB

Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever other than
OFF
“R” position

Speaker Test

Revision: 2009 November AV-24 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a A
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
B
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.

Tweeter : 3 kHz
C
Front door speaker : 300 Hz
Rear door speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB

D
Climate Control
Refer to “HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM” for details.
Error History E
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition SW is turned ON
and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error that F
may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the G
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
Count up method B H
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error I
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.

Display type of occur-


Error history display item J
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
Count up method B Other than the above K

AV

P
JSNIA0151GB

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Revision: 2009 November AV-25 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-30, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace the AV control unit.
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
• Display unit power supply and ground
circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in communica- • Display unit power supply and ground
tion circuit between AV control unit and circuit.
Front Display Connection Error
display unit. • Communication circuit between AV con-
• Malfunction is detected in communica- trol unit and display unit.
tion signal between AV control unit and
display unit.
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in communica-
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
tion circuit between AV control unit and
ground circuit.
satellite radio tuner.
• Communication circuit between AV con-
SAT Connection Error • Malfunction is detected in communica-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
tion signal between AV control unit and
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
satellite radio tuner.
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
• Malfunction is detected in request signal
circuit between AV control unit and satel-
lite radio tuner.
• Multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in AV communi- • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT cation circuit between AV control unit and ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error multifunction switch. • AV communication circuit between AV
• Malfunction is detected in AV communi- control unit and multifunction switch.
cation signal between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis


• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if reset.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA0080GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39

AV COMM Diagnosis

Revision: 2009 November AV-26 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit. A
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
B
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• If it resets, the error counter is erased.

C
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA0213GB
C Tx (ITM–SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
D
C Rx (PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx (XM–ITM) — —

Delete Unit Connection Log E


Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed) F

H
JSNIA0154GB

Initialize Settings
I
Initializes the AV control unit memory.

L
JSNIA0155GB

CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000005621186

M
CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.
AV
Diagnosis mode Description
Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication O
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
P
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.

Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.

Revision: 2009 November AV-27 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Detection Range

JPNIA0515GB

Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-30, "Diagnosis Procedure".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Replace the AV control unit.
malfunction is detected.
Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200]
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN CONT [U1216]
• Display unit power supply and ground
circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in communica- • Display unit power supply and ground
tion circuit between AV control unit and circuit.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
display unit. • Communication circuit between AV con-
• Malfunction is detected in communica- trol unit and display unit.
tion signal between AV control unit and
display unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-28 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in communica-
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
tion circuit between AV control unit and B
ground circuit.
satellite radio tuner.
• Communication circuit between AV con-
SAT CONN [U1255] • Malfunction is detected in communica-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
tion signal between AV control unit and
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
satellite radio tuner.
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
C
• Malfunction is detected in request signal
circuit between AV control unit and satel-
lite radio tuner.
D
• Multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuit malfunction is detected.
• Malfunction is detected in AV communi- • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] cation circuit between AV control unit and ground circuits. E
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] multifunction switch. • AV communication circuit between AV
• Malfunction is detected in AV communi- control unit and multifunction switch.
cation signal between AV control unit and
multifunction switch. F

DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS G
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
H

Dis-
Display Item Vehicle status Remarks
play
I
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
On Parking brake is applied. mal. J
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
On Light switch ON
ILLUM SIG K
Off Light switch OFF

On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position L
On Shift the selector lever to “R” position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
REV SIG Shift the selector lever other than “R”
Off mal.
position M

SELECTION FROM MENU


Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
AV
selected vehicle signals.

Item to be selected Description


O
VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG P
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG

Revision: 2009 November AV-29 2010 G37 Sedan


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621187

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-28, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621188

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC Diagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621189

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-19, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-38, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2009 November AV-30 2010 G37 Sedan


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621190

Initial diagnosis of AV control unit. B


DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621191

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

Display contents of CON-


DTC Diagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location
SULT-III D
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621192 E

1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT


When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. F

>> INSPECTION END


G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-31 2010 G37 Sedan


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621193

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-90, "Exploded View".

Part name Description


• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communica-
tion to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con-
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621194

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 Replace AV control unit.
[U1310] circuit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-32 2010 G37 Sedan


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621195

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-90, "Exploded View". B

Part name Description


• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control C
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communica- D
tion to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con- E
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks. F

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621196

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
H
Cont Unit
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM Replace AV control unit.
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]
I

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-33 2010 G37 Sedan


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621197

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-90, "Exploded View".

Part name Description


• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communica-
tion to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con-
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621198

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
U1216 Replace AV control unit.
[U1216] detected.

Revision: 2009 November AV-34 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621199

B
Part name Description
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from
DISPLAY UNIT C
AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621200 D

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT-III
• Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
tion is detected. • Display unit power supply and
FRONT DISP CONN • Malfunction is detected in communication circuit be- ground circuit. F
U1243
[U1243] tween AV control unit and display unit. • Communication circuit between AV
• Malfunction is detected in communication signal be- control unit and display unit.
tween AV control unit and display unit.
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621201

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT H


Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-40, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. K

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals L
11 56
M71 M83 Existed
22 44
M
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit AV
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M71 Not existed O
22
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-35 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 11 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 22 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace display unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-36 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621202

B
Part name Description
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs it to the
AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER C
• It is controlled with the communication (communication signal, request signal)
from AV control unit.

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005621203 D

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT-III
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit • Satellite radio tuner power supply
malfunction is detected. and ground circuit.
• Malfunction is detected in communication circuit be- • Communication circuit between AV F
SAT CONN tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. control unit and satellite radio tun-
U1255
[U1255] • Malfunction is detected in communication signal be- er.
tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. • Request signal circuit between AV
• Malfunction is detected in request signal circuit be- control unit and satellite radio tun-
G
tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner. er.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621204 H

1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-42, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : I
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.
L

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals M
28 8
M82 29 B236 9 Existed
30 10 AV
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
O
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
28 Ground P
M82 29 Not existed
30
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-37 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE


1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals

28 Ground

SKIA9299J
M82

29 Ground

SKIA9300J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
Satellite radio tuner (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

B236 10 Ground

SKIA9301J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.

Revision: 2009 November AV-38 2010 G37 Sedan


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621205

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
D
• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit
• Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT malfunction is detected.
and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300] • Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuit be-
• AV communication circuit between E
U1240 • SWITCH CONN tween AV control unit and multifunction switch.
AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240] • Malfunction is detected in AV communication signal be-
switch.
tween AV control unit and multifunction switch.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-39 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621206

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Ignition switch ON or START 3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply M81 19 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M81 7 ACC Battery voltage
Ignition signal M85 104 ON Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
M81 20
Ground OFF Existed
M85 85
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621207

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)


Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Inverter VCC 2
M71 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2009 November AV-40 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY) A


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and AV control unit harness connector.
B
Signal name Display unit (M71) AV control unit (M83) Continuity
Inverter VCC 2 59 Existed
C
Signal VCC 3 47 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and ground.
D
Signal name Display unit (M71) — Continuity
Inverter VCC 2 Ground Not existed
Signal VCC 3 Ground Not existed E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. F

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)


1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector. G
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
H
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Inverter VCC 59
M83 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 47 I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replacement of AV control unit. J
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity L
Ground M71 1 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621208

1.CHECK FUSE O

Check for blown fuses.


P
Power source Fuse No.
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Revision: 2009 November AV-41 2010 G37 Sedan
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
ACC power supply M72 3 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M72 1 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621209

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply B236 12 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply B236 16 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.

Revision: 2009 November AV-42 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621210

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621211

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 17 M83 40 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 17 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

L
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 17 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2238J
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. O

Revision: 2009 November AV-43 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621212

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621213

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 6 M83 39 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 6 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 6 Ground
selecting “Color Spec-
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2236J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-44 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621214

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621215

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 18 M83 38 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 18 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

L
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 18 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2237J
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. O

Revision: 2009 November AV-45 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621216

Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with
AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621217

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 19 M83 41 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 19 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal

M71 19 Ground

SKIB3603E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-46 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621218

Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display B
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621219

C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 9 M83 43 Existed
F
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit G
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 9 Not existed
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
I
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+) K
Reference value
Display unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
At RGB image displayed 5V

M
M71 9 Ground At AUX image is dis-
played.
AV

PKIB4948J

Is the inspection result normal? O


YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-47 2010 G37 Sedan


HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621220

In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon-
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621221

1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 8 M83 45 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 8 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal

M71 8 Ground

SKIB3601E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit.
NO >> Replace display unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-48 2010 G37 Sedan


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621222

In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon- B
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621223 C

1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
Display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 20 M83 57 Existed F

4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.


G
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 20 Not existed H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I

2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL


1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal L

M
M71 20 Ground

AV
SKIB3598E

Is the inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace AV control unit.
NO >> Replace display unit.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-49 2010 G37 Sedan


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621224

• Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
• AV control unit transmits the image signal that is inputted to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621225

1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Auxiliary input jacks AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M154 7 M84 66 Existed
4. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.

Auxiliary input jacks


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M154 7 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.

(+)
Auxiliary input jacks (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

M154 7 Ground At AUX image displayed.

SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT AND DISPLAY UNIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 15 M83 36 Existed

Revision: 2009 November AV-50 2010 G37 Sedan


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.
A
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B
M71 15 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector. D
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
E
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
F
Connector Terminal

M71 15 Ground At AUX image displayed.


H

SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal? I


YES >> Replace display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-51 2010 G37 Sedan


CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621226

The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621227

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Multifunction switch AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M72 14 M85 103 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Multifunction switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M72 14 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Pressing the eject switch 0V
M85 103 Ground
Except for above 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace preset switch.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-52 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621232

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621233

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
AV control unit Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E
M81 6 M36 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
F
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
G
M81 6 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable. I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
M81 6 M81 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-53, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005621234

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-53 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17


VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω
JSNIA0215GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-54 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621235

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621236

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
AV control unit Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E
M81 16 M36 31 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
F
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
G
M81 16 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable. I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
M81 16 M81 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-55, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005621237

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-55 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17


VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω
JSNIA0215GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-56 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621238

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621239

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
D
AV control unit Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E
M81 15 M36 33 Existed
3. Connect AV control unit connector.
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE G

Check spiral cable.


Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT I
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
J
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
K
M81 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. L
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
AV
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005621240 O

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-57 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17


VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω
JSNIA0215GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-58 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005621241
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM C
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On


VHCL SPD SIG D
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off

Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On


PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off
E
Ignition switch Light switch ON On
ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch F
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC G
Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On
REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT

K
JSNIA2871ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition M
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

AV

Ignition
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(L) (W) O
ON

SKIB3609E
P

Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output
(LG) (SB)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-59 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing SOURCE
0V
switch.
Ignition
6 15 Keep pressing switch. 0.7 V
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(P) (B)
ON 1.3 V
Keep pressing switch.
Except for above. 3.3 V
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
ACC
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V
9
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(L) Lighting switch is ON. 12 V
OFF

Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(BR) (R)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
13 14 Sound signal rear speaker
Output switch Sound output
(L) (P) RH
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
15
Ground Steering switch signal GND — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
switch.
Ignition
16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch Keep pressing VOL UP
(L) (B) 0.7 V
ON switch.
Except for above. 3.3 V
Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(B) (W) LH is selected.
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-60 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
24 23 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode C
Input switch
(G) (R) RH is selected.
ON

SKIB3609E D
25 — Shield — — — —
26 — Shield — — — —
E

Ignition F
28 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON

G
SKIA9299J

H
Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(G) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON
I

SKIA9300J

Ignition
30 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch K
(L) (CONT→SAT) is selected
ON

SKIA9301J L

M
Ignition
36
Ground Composite image signal Output switch At AUX image is displayed
(BR)
ON
AV
SKIB2251J

Ignition
37 O
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON

Start confirmation/adjust- P
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
38 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch
(P) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J

Revision: 2009 November AV-61 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
39 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch
(L) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
40 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch
(G) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J

Ignition
41
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E

42 — Shield — — — —
At RGB image is displayed 5V

Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) At AUX image is displayed
ON

PKIB4948J

Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

Ignition
45 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Ignition
46
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-62 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9V
(BG)
ACC
C

Ignition
48 Composite synchronizing
(BR)
Ground
signal
Output switch — D
ON

SKIA0187E E
49
— Shield — — — —
(Y)
50 — Shield — — — — F
55
— Shield — — — —
(B)
G

Ignition
56 Communication signal When adjusting display H
Ground Output switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J I

J
Ignition
57 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Input switch —
(G) signal
ON
K
SKIB3598E

Ignition
58
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
L
(BR)
ON
Ignition
59 M
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC

AV
Ignition
66 When AUX mode is select-
Ground AUX image signal Input switch
(G) ed
ON O

SKIB2251J

73 — Shield — — — — P
Ignition
74
Ground AUX image signal ground — switch — 0V
(R)
ON
84 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-63 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
85
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
88 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
89 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
90 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
91 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output

Ignition
95 When AUX mode is select-
Ground AUX sound signal RH Input switch
(R) ed
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
96 When AUX mode is select-
Ground AUX sound signal LH Input switch
(W) ed
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
97
Ground AUX sound signal ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
101
Ground SW ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON

103 Pressing the eject switch 0V


Ground Eject signal Input —
(V) Except for above 3.3 V
Ignition
104
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
Ignition R position 12 V
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(BG) Other than R position 0V
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-64 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Parking brake ON 0V B

106
Ignition C
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(SB) Parking brake OFF
ON

D
JSNIA0007GB

NOTE:
Maximum voltage may be 12 V
E
due to specifications (connected
units).
Ignition F
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON

SKIA6649J

137 — FM sub Input — — — H


138 — AM–FM main Input — — —
Ignition
139 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12 V I
ACC

DTC Index INFOID:0000000005621243


J

SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM


K
DTC Display item Refer to
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-30, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-31, "Diagnosis Procedure"
L

U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-32, "DTC Logic"


U1200 Cont Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] AV-33, "DTC Logic"
M
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-34, "DTC Logic"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-35, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1255 SAT CONN [U1255] AV-37, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-39, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
O

Revision: 2009 November AV-65 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005621244

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JPNIA0006ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9V
(BG)
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON
5
— Shield — — — —
(Y)

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
6 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch
(L) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J

7 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Output switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Revision: 2009 November AV-66 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image is displayed 5V B

9
Ignition C
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(B) At AUX image is displayed
ON

D
PKIB4948J

Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness. F
ON

PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
H
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
I

Ignition
15 J
Ground Composite image signal Input switch At AUX image is displayed
(BR)
ON

SKIB2251J K

L
Ignition
16 Composite synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(BR) signal
ON
M
SKIA0187E

AV
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
17 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch
(G) “Color Spectrum Bar” on O
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-67 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
18 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch
(P) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J

Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E

Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Output switch —
(G) signal
ON

SKIB3598E

21 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
22 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

23
— Shield — — — —
(B)

Revision: 2009 November AV-68 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005621246

JPNIA0010ZZ E

PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output G

H
Ignition
2 1 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(R) (G) LH is selected.
ON
I
SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 3 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(B) (W) RH is selected. K
ON

SKIB3609E
L
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
M

Ignition
8 Request signal When satellite radio mode
(G)
Ground
(SAT→CONT)
Output switch
is selected.
AV
ON

SKIA9299J O

Ignition P
9 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(L) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9300J

Revision: 2009 November AV-69 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output

Ignition
10 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9301J

Ignition
12
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
16
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG)
ACC
33 — Satellite antenna Input — — —
34 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-70 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005621242
B
NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually. C

AV

JCNWM3702GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-71 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3703GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-72 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3704GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-73 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3705GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-74 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3706GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-75 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3707GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-76 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3708GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-77 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3709GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-78 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3710GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-79 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3711GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-80 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3712GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-81 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3713GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-82 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005621248
B

OPERATION
C
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
• All switches cannot be operated.
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-27,
• “MULTI AV” is displayed with CON-
"CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". D
SULT-III.
• All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit mal-
Multifunction switch and preset • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
function. Refer to AV-40, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diag- E
switch operation does not work. tem selection screen the CONSULT-
nosis Procedure".
III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Per-
Only specified switch cannot be oper-
form multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagno- F
ated.
sis function. Refer to AV-20, "Diagnosis Description".

RELATED TO RGB IMAGE


G
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. H
III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Display unit power supply circuit.
RGB image is not shown. Refer to AV-40, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III I
dure".
self-diagnosis results.
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit.
Refer to AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (R: red) circuit. J
Light blue (Cyan) tint.
Refer to AV-43, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Color of RGB image is not RGB signal (G: green) circuit.
Purple (Magenta) tint.
proper. Refer to AV-44, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit.
Screen looks yellowish.
Refer to AV-45, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RGB screen is rolling. —


RGB synchronizing signal circuit. L
Refer to AV-46, "Diagnosis Procedure".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)". M
Fuel economy display is mal-
functioning. Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III
Refer to AV-40, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
self-diagnosis results.
dure".
AV
RELATED TO AUDIO
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take O
CD eject signal circuit. Refer to AV-52, "Diagnosis Pro-
The CD cannot be removed. —
cedure".
No sound from all speakers. AV control unit. Refer to AV-90, "Exploded View". P

Audio sound is not heard. Sound is not heard only from the specif-
ic places (RH front, RH rear, LH front Sound signal circuit of malfunctioning system.
and LH rear).

Revision: 2009 November AV-83 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for
looseness.
NOTE:
“ANTENNA” is not displayed even when
Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.)
the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite ra-
2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
dio mode.
3. Replace the satellite radio antenna.
Refer to AV-97, "Exploded View".
4. Replace the satellite radio tuner.
Refer to AV-96, "Exploded View".
Satellite radio is not received.
Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check the connection between Satellite radio tun-
er and antenna feeder.
2. Check the connection between Satellite radio an-
“ANTENNA” is displayed when the
tenna and antenna feeder.
channel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio
3. Check Antenna feeder for open circuit.
mode.
4. Replace the satellite radio antenna.
Refer to AV-97, "Exploded View".
5. Replace the satellite radio tuner.
Refer to AV-96, "Exploded View".
The sound of Satellite radio is Satellite radio sound signal circuit malfunction between
Other audio sounds are normal.
not heard. satellite radio tuner and AV control unit.
It does not change to Satellite There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
radio mode. III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-27, "CONSULT - III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna feeder.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH


Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Inspection location / Probable malfunction location
Steering switch signal GND circuit.
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-57, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Steering switch. Refer to AV-100, "Exploded View".
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” switches of Steering switch signal A circuit.
steering switch are not operated. Refer to AV-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".
”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN” switches of steering switch are not Steering switch signal B circuit.
operated. Refer to AV-55, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT


NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes AUX sound signal circuits malfunction between auxilia-
AUX mode is selected. are selected. ry input jacks and AV control unit.
• AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxil-
iary input jacks and AV control unit.
Refer to AV-50, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc-
Image is not displayed when
— tion between AV control unit and display unit.
AUX mode is selected.
Refer to AV-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
control unit and display unit.
Refer to AV-47, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
It does not change from AUX
— between AV control unit and display unit.
mode to other modes.
Refer to AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Revision: 2009 November AV-84 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621249

BASIC OPERATIONS B

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display. C
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Press <DISC> to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Press <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
D
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction. E
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.
F
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. G
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE: H
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact I
Disc Standard and may not play.

Symptom Cause and Counter measure


J
Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone K
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. L
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, M
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the AV
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright. O
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing. P
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.

Revision: 2009 November AV-85 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma”,
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.

Revision: 2009 November AV-86 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005719739

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000005621251

K
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. L
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000005621252 M

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line AV
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: 2009 November AV-87 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Revision: 2009 November AV-88 2010 G37 Sedan


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000005621253
B

Tool name Description


C

D
Power tool Loosening screws

E
PBIC0191E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-89 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621254

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0113ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket LH 3. AV control unit


4. Bracket RH

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621255

REMOVAL
1. Remove display unit.
2. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be
careful not to insert them wrongly.

Revision: 2009 November AV-90 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621256

Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T B
models).
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621257

C
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models). D
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION E
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-91 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621258

JSNIA0164ZZ

1. Front door speaker


2. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621259

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the front door speaker from speaker bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-92 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621260

D
JSNIA0165ZZ

E
1. Rear door speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621261


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove rear door speaker from rear door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. H

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-93 2010 G37 Sedan


TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
TWEETER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621262

JSNIA0166ZZ

1. Door finisher
2. Tweeter

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621263

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the tweeter from the front door finisher.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-94 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ANTENNA AMP.
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621264

D
JSNIA0123ZZ

E
1. AM-FM main connector
2. Antenna amp.
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621265

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove rear pillar finisher LH. Refer to INT-15, "Exploded View".
2. Remove antenna amp. from rear pillar LH.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-95 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621266

JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621267

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View".
3. Remove screws (A) from inside the cabin, and remove TEL
adapter unit and TEL antenna as a single unit from trunk room
side.
4. Remove bracket screws and remove TEL adapter unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-96 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621268

D
JSNIA0124ZZ

E
1. Satellite radio antenna
: Vehicle front
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621269

REMOVAL G
1. Remove head lining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT-
24, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" (normal roof models) or INT-27, "SUNROOF : Exploded View"
(sunroof models).
H
2. Remove nut, and then remove satellite radio antenna from roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. I

Satellite radio antenna mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION: J
Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof
panel may be deformed, when satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.
K

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-97 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621270

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0126ZZ

1. Center ventilator grille


2. Multifunction switch

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621271

REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove multi function switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multi function switch from center ventilator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-98 2010 G37 Sedan


PRESET SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
PRESET SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621272

REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY C

JPNIA0136ZZ H

1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch


I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621273

REMOVAL
J
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove preset switch screws (A), (B), and (C), and then K
remove preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.

1. Clock
L

JSNIA0127ZZ
AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: O
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-99 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621274

Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621275

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-100 2010 G37 Sedan


AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621276

REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-38, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY C

JSNIA0131ZZ
F

1. Auxiliary input jacks


G
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621277

REMOVAL H
1. Remove center console. (M/T models) Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View".
Remove center console cup. (A/T models) Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View".
2. Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console. (M/T models) I
Remove auxiliary input jacks from center console cup. (A/T models)
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-101 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITHOUT REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ANTENNA FEEDER
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000005851498

JSNIA2879GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-102 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005719738

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000005681546

K
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. L
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000005681547 M

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line AV
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: 2009 November AV-103 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Revision: 2009 November AV-104 2010 G37 Sedan


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000005681549
B

Tool Description
C

D
Power tool Loosening screws

E
PBIC0191E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-105 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005681890

JSNIA2600ZZ

1. Tweeter LH 2. Front door speaker LH 3. Rear door speaker LH


4. Antenna amp. 5. TEL antenna 6. Rear view camera
7. TEL adapter unit 8. Satellite radio tuner 9. Rear door speaker RH
10. Satellite radio antenna 11. Front door speaker RH 12. Tweeter RH
13. Microphone 14. Steering switch 15. Steering angle sensor
16. Preset switch 17. USB connector 18. AV control unit
19. Multifunction switch 20. Display unit
Lower part of rear parcel shelf (on the
A. Within rear pillar finisher LH B. C. Spiral cable removed condition
right side)

Revision: 2009 November AV-106 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Component Description INFOID:0000000005681567

Part name Description


• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control B
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication sig-
nals from the AV control unit.
• The AV control unit includes the audio, USB connection and vehicle information
functions. C
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
AV control unit to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
• It is connected to the steering angle sensor and receives the steering angle sensor
signal via CAN communication.
D
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and park-
ing brake). E
• TEL voice signal and voice guidance signal are input from TEL adapter unit.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit and
operates. F
Display unit • RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB image, RGB area and RGB
synchronizing).
• Composite image signals are input from AV control unit.
G
• Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
Front door speaker
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
H
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
Rear door speaker
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from AV control unit.
Tweeter
• Outputs high range sound.
I
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio operations
are integrated.
Multifunction switch J
• Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV
control unit via AV communication.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air con-
ditioner, etc. operations are integrated. K
Preset switch • Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted
to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
L
• Camera power supply is input from AV control unit.
Rear view camera
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to AV control unit.
It is connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle sensor signal
Steering angle sensor M
via CAN communication.
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone and voice control, etc. are possible.
Steering switch
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition. AV
Microphone • Microphone signal is transmitted to TEL adapter unit.
• Power (Microphone VCC) is supplied from TEL adapter unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control O
Antenna amp. unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the sound P
signal to the AV control unit.
Satellite radio tuner
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communication
signal and request signal).
Satellite radio antenna Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to satellite radio tuner.
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to the AV control unit.
TEL adapter unit • It is connected with the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled with
the AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-107 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Part name Description
TEL antenna Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to the TEL adapter unit.
USB connector Image signal*1 and sound signal of USB input is transmitted to AV control unit.

*1: Image signals cannot be received from iPod®.

Revision: 2009 November AV-108 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SYSTEM
A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005681900
B

J
JSNIA2603GB

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION K
SWITCH virtually.
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005681572

L
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

FUNCTION NAME M
Audio function
Hands-free phone function
AV
Rear view monitor function
Vehicle information function

COMMUNICATION SIGNAL O
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L). P
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information.
• AV control unit is connected with display and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of
display and display control and receives the response signal from display.
AUDIO FUNCTION

Revision: 2009 November AV-109 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated with multifunction switch,
preset switch, steering switch. Operation status of audio is indicated at display.

FUNCTION
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
USB connection function

Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
Screen Display
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between display unit and AV control unit.
• The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
RGB image synchronizing signal.
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV
control unit. AV control unit outputs the sound signal to each speaker.
Satellite Radio Mode
• Satellite radio tuner is controlled by communication signal and request signal with AV control unit.
• Sound signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna and transmitted to AV control unit. AV control
unit is output the sound signal (satellite radio) to each speaker.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs the sound signal to each speaker when inserting the CD to AV control unit.
USB Connection Function
• iPod or music files in USB memory can be played.
• iPod sound signals are transmitted from USB connector to the AV control unit and to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB connector.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTE:
Use the enclosed USB harness when connecting iPod® to USB connector.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and TEL adapter unit is performed with Bluetooth™ communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the TEL adapter unit to the AV control unit and output to the front
speaker when operating the cellular phone.
• TEL adapter unit has the on board self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-124, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
When A Call Is Originated
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to TEL adapter unit.
• TEL adapter unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal.
• Voice sound is then heard at the other party.
When Receiving A Call
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party.
• TEL voice signal is input to TEL adapter unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output to front speaker.
REAR VIEW MONITOR FUNCTION
• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-110 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the AV control unit when power is supplied from the AV
control unit. A
• The AV control unit transmits a warning message, fixed guide lines, and predictive course lines to the display
unit by RGB image signal. Rear view monitor images are displayed by combining the RGB image signal and
the camera image signals from the rear view camera.
B
• Predictive course lines are controlled by a steering angle sensor signal received the AV control unit via CAN
communication.
VEHICLE INFORMATION FUNCTION C
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy and maintenance are displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication
from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp.
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings D
function.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-111 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005681573

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000005681574

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION


The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch cannot be checked.

JSNIA0136GB

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode


Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display unit.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
control unit and each unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-112 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar
Display Diagnosis
display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals B
lights, ignition and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
C
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment D
• Guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be ad-
Camera Cont. justed.
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored. E
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be mon-
AV COMM Diagnosis
itored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history. F
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.

METHOD OF STARTING G
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
H
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed I
by pressing “BACK” button.

K
JSNIA2584ZZ

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the


items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be L
selected.

AV

SKIB3961E
O
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
P
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.

Revision: 2009 November AV-113 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction Note Red Green

NOTE: JSNIA2528ZZ
Control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined
according to the following order of priority: red > gray.

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a


component in the diagnosis result screen.

JSNIA0141GB

Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode


• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to


Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit
Control unit function in those components, replace AV
power supply and ground circuits.
control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded
View".

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow.

Revision: 2009 November AV-114 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Possible malfunction location / Action to A


Area with yellow connection lines Description
take
Malfunction is detected in serial communi-
Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and display unit. B
display unit.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and C
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV con- • Communication circuit between AV con-
Control unit ⇔ SAT
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
functioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
D
• request signal circuit between AV control trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
unit and satellite radio tuner are malfunc-
tioning. E
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
ground circuits. F
Control unit ⇔ BTHF ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
G
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted. H
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust- I
ment Mode screen.

JSNIA0147GB

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-115 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Display Diagnosis

JSNIA2233GB

Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

JSNIA0149GB

Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position

Revision: 2009 November AV-116 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks
A
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever other than
OFF B
“R” position

Speaker Test
Select “Speaker Test” to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. C
Press “Start” to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press “Start” again
to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press “End” to stop the
test tones.
D

JSNIA0150GB
F
Climate Control
Refer to “HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM” for details.
Error History G
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned H
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
I
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if J
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
K
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
L
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.

Display type of occur- M


Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-117 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JSNIA0151GB

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Function".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) tion occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
Predictive course line center position ad- Adjust the predictive course line center po-
Steer. Angle Sensor Calibration justment of the steering angle sensor is in- sition of the steering angle sensor.
complete. Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Function".
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground cir-
circuits.
Front Display Connection Error cuits are malfunctioning.
• Communication circuits between AV con-
• communication circuits between AV con-
trol unit and display unit.
trol unit and display unit are malfunction-
ing.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV con- • Communication circuit between AV con-
XM Connection Error
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
functioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
• request signal circuit between AV control trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
unit and satellite radio tuner are malfunc-
tioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.

Revision: 2009 November AV-118 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning. B
• H/F Unit Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
C
AV communication circuits between AV
• Switches Connection Error tion circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and multifunction switch.
• H/F Unit Connection Error multifunction switch are malfunctioning.
D
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Correct Draw Line of Rear view Cam”, “Con-
firm Configuration” are available.
E

G
JSNIA2230ZZ

H
Adjust Offset of Rear view Camera
• Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor
camera. I

K
JSNIA2231ZZ

L
Factory Configuration Confirmation
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.

AV

O
JSNIA2234ZZ

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis P

Revision: 2009 November AV-119 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA2235ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(BCM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(VDC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(STRG) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA2505ZZ
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(BTHF-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)

JSNIA0154GB

Initialize Settings

Revision: 2009 November AV-120 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
“User Data Initialization” and “Accessory Number Initialization” are
possible. A
CAUTION:
• Never perform Accessory Number Initialization except when
configuration is unsuccessful.
B
• Accessory Number Initialization requires configuration. For
details, refer to AV-160, "Description".

JSNIA2237ZZ

D
CONSULT - III Function INFOID:0000000005681575

CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS E
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.

Diagnosis mode Description


F
Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
G
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
Work Support Steering angle sensor can be adjusted.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. H
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.

AV Communication
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed. I

Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter. J
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
K
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively. L
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
M
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


AV
CAN communication malfunction is de-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".
tected.
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is de- O
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
tected.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] tion occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View". P
Cont Unit [U1200]
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN CONT [U1216]
Adjust the predictive course line center
Predictive course line center position ad- position of the steering angle sensor.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [U1232] justment of the steering angle sensor is in- Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUA-
complete. TOR NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUST-
MENT : Description".

Revision: 2009 November AV-121 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground
circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] circuits are malfunctioning.
• Communication circuits between AV
• communication circuits between AV
control unit and display unit.
control unit and display unit are mal-
functioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV • Communication circuit between AV con-
SAT CONN [U1255]
control unit and satellite radio tuner are trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
malfunctioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
• request signal circuit between AV con- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal-
functioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
AV communication circuits between AV
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] tion circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and multifunction switch.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] multifunction switch.

DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks


On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than R

Revision: 2009 November AV-122 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SELECTION FROM MENU
Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the A
selected vehicle signals.

Item to be selected Description B


VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” C
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG D
WORK SUPPORT
Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
CAUTION: E
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side.
F
Item Description
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
G
CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.
H
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
I
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-123 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000005681576

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS


During on board diagnosis the diagnosis function of TEL adapter unit starts with the operation of the steering
switch and performs the diagnosis when ignition switch ACC.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
The on board diagnosis has 3 modes: the self-diagnosis mode that performs the trouble diagnosis, the
speaker adaptation data deleting mode and the hands-free phone system initialization mode.
CAUTION:
• Perform the diagnosis with the vehicle stopped.
• Perform STEP2 if necessary.

STEP MODE Description


The self-diagnosis mode performs the microphone test and
the diagnosis of TEL adapter unit, TEL antenna and steering
STEP1 Self-diagnosis
unit, and then reads out the results with the sound and indi-
cates them on the display.
The speaker adaptation data deleting mode can delete the
Speaker adaptation data deleting
speaker adaptation data.
STEP2
Hands-free phone system initialization mode can perform
Hands-free phone system initialization
the initialization of hands-free phone system.

Self-diagnosis results
Self-diagnosis mode reads out the self-diagnosis results.
NOTE:
• Error count is read out simultaneously when reading out the DTC name.
• The errors are read out continuously when some errors occur at the same time.
Self-diagnosis results
DTC DTC name Possible causes
DTC 10000 INTERNAL FAILURE TEL adapter unit
DTC 01000 ANT. SHORT TO BATT OR OPEN
TEL antenna
DTC 00100 ANT. SHORT TO GROUND
DTC 00010 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK A
Steering switch
DTC 00001 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK B
DTC 00000 THERE ARE NO FAILURE RECORDS TO REPORT —

The Details of Error Count


The error count guides “0” when the error occurs. The next time it counts up “1” if it is normal with the ignition
switch ON. It continues the count up unless the initialization of hands-free phone system is performed.

Revision: 2009 November AV-124 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
FLOW CHART OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A

AV

JSNIA2498GB
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-125 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858796

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On


VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off

Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On


PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off

Ignition switch Light switch ON On


ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC

Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On


REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA2831ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Revision: 2009 November AV-126 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

2 3
Ignition C
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(L) (W)
ON

D
SKIB3609E

E
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output
(LG) (SB)
ON F

SKIB3609E

Ignition G
6 15 Keep pressing SOURCE
Steering switch signal A Input switch 0V
(P) (B) switch.
ON
Keep pressing MENU UP H
0.7 V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU
1.3 V
DOWN switch.
I
Keep pressing 2.0 V
switch
Except for above. 3.3 V J
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
ACC K
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V
9
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
OFF
L

Ignition M
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(BR) (R)
ON

AV
SKIB3609E

O
Ignition
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output
(L) (P)
ON
P

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-127 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing VOL UP
16 15 0.7 V
Steering switch signal B Input switch switch.
(L) (B)
ON
Keep pressing switch. 1.3 V

Except for above. 3.3 V


Ignition
18
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(G)
ON
Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
36
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(BG)
ACC
Ignition
37
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
OFF

Ignition
38 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Ignition
39 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V

Ignition
40
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) At DVD image is displayed.
ON

PKIB4948J

41 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-128 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
42 C
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E D

Start Confirmation/Adjust- E
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
43
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(G)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen. F
JSNIA1029ZZ

G
Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
44
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(L)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
H
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1030ZZ
I

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis- J
45
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(P)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.
K
JSNIA1031ZZ

Ignition
46
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y) L
ON

M
Ignition
47 At rear view camera image
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(BR) is displayed.
ON
AV

SKIB2251J

Ignition O
48
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
49 P
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
OFF

Revision: 2009 November AV-129 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
50 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Input switch —
(G) signal
ON

SKIB3598E

Ignition
51 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

52
— Shield — — — —
(B)
57 — Shield — — — —
58 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
62 At rear view camera image
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(W) is displayed.
ON

SKIB2251J

71 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
72
Ground Camera ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition
73 At rear view camera image
Ground Camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(R) is displayed.
ON
76 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
77 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
78 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
79 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
80 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
81 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
Ignition
82
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
86 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-130 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition During voice guide output


87 88 C
TEL voice signal Input switch with the switch
(L) (P)
ON pressed.

SKIB3609E D
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification E
(destination unit).
Ignition
92 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH) F
ON

G
JSNIA0012GB

Parking brake is ON. 0V


H

Ignition
93
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(SB) Parking brake is OFF. I
ON

JSNIA0007GB J
Ignition R position 12.0 V
94
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(BG) Other than R position 0V
ON K
Ignition
95
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
L
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
96
Ground Disk eject signal Input switch
(V) Except for above. 3.3 V
ON
M

Ignition AV
120 124 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(B) (W) LH is selected.
ON

O
SKIB3609E

P
Ignition
121 125 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(G) (R) RH is selected.
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-131 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
122 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(L) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9301J

126 — Shield — — — —
127 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
129 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9299J

Ignition
130 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(G) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9300J

132
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
133
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R)
134
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W)
135
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
136 — Shield — — — —
137 — FM sub Input — — —
138 — AM-FM main Input — — —
Ignition
139 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
ACC

DTC Index INFOID:0000000005681588

SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

DTC Display item Refer to


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-162, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-163, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Cont Unit [U1200] AV-164, "DTC Logic"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-165, "DTC Logic"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-166, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Revision: 2009 November AV-132 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DTC Display item Refer to
A
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-167, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1255 SAT CONN [U1255] AV-169, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-172, "DTC Logic" B
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-171, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] C
AV-171, "Description"
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV-171, "Description"
D
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-133 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858802

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JPNIA0006ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(BG)
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
6
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(L)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1030ZZ

7 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Output switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Revision: 2009 November AV-134 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V B

9
Ignition C
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(B) At DVD image is displayed.
ON

D
PKIB4948J

Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness. F
ON

PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
H
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
I

Ignition
15 At rear view camera image J
Ground Composite image signal Input switch
(BR) is displayed.
ON

SKIB2251J K

Start Confirmation/Adjust- L
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
17
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(G)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen. M
JSNIA1029ZZ

AV
Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
18
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(P) O
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1031ZZ
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-135 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E

Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Output switch —
(G) signal
On

SKIB3598E

21 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
22 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

23
— Shield — — — —
(B)

Revision: 2009 November AV-136 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858803

JPNIA0010ZZ E

PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output G

H
Ignition
2 1 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(R) (G) LH is selected.
ON
I
SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 3 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(B) (W) RH is selected K
ON

SKIB3609E
L
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
M

Ignition
8 Request signal When satellite radio mode
(G)
Ground
(SAT→CONT)
Output switch
is selected
AV
ON

SKIA9299J O

Ignition P
9 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(L) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON

SKIA9300J

Revision: 2009 November AV-137 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output

Ignition
10 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (CONT→SAT) is selected
ON

SKIA9301J

Ignition
12
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
16
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG)
ACC
33 — Satellite antenna Input — — —
34 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-138 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858804

JPNIA0011ZZ E

PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage H
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
2
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(LG) I
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG) J
ON
Ignition
4
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON K
5 — Shield — — — —

L
Ignition
7
8 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(R)
ON M

PKIB5037J
AV

Ignition During voice guide output


9 10 O
TEL voice signal Output switch with the switch
(Y) (G)
ON pressed

P
SKIB3609E

Ignition
14
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
23
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-139 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
24
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Ignition
28 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(W) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON

JSNIA0012GB

Ignition
29
8 Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(G)
ON
33 — TEL antenna Input — — —
34 — Shield — — — —
35 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
36 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output

Revision: 2009 November AV-140 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005681595
B
NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually. C

AV

JCNWM3714GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-141 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3715GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-142 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3716GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-143 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3717GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-144 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3718GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-145 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3719GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-146 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3720GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-147 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3721GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-148 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3722GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-149 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3723GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-150 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3724GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-151 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3725GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-152 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3726GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-153 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3727GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-154 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV

JCNWM3728GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-155 2010 G37 Sedan


BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

JCNWM3729GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-156 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005681976
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Function".


• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-196, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: 2009 November AV-157 2010 G37 Sedan
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III
Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-196, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2009 November AV-158 2010 G37 Sedan


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681598

BEFORE REPLACEMENT B
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT-III configuration
before replacement.
AFTER REPLACEMENT C
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT-III.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order. D
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005681599 E

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


F
-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-160, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE: G
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View". I

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION J

-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-160, "Work Procedure". K

>> GO TO 4.
L
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal. M

>> WORK END


AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-159 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005681600

• Since vehicle specifications are not included in the AV control unit after replacement, it is required to write
vehicle specifications with CONSULT-III.
• Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005681601

NOTE:
If “WRITE CONFIGURATION” is unsuccessful, perform “Accessory Number Initialization”. For details, refer to
AV-112, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
After performing “Accessory Number Initialization”, reboot the AV control unit to perform “WRITE CONFIGU-
RATION”.
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of “MULTI AV”.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-CONFIG FILE”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file”.

>> WORK END


3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-MANUAL SELECTION”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit.
For data to write, refer to AV-160, "Configuration List".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal.

>> WORK END


Configuration List INFOID:0000000005843574

CAUTION:
Check vehicle specifications before servicing.

Revision: 2009 November AV-160 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

MANUAL SETTING ITEM A


NOTE
Items Setting value
LHD —
STEERING B
RHD —
SPORT premium grade
MODE 1
with 4WAS
C
SPORT premium grade
GRADE
MODE 3 2WD models without
4WAS
D
MODE 2 Except for above
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH — E
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
F

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-161 2010 G37 Sedan


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681627

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-28, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681628

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000]
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681629

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-19, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-38, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2009 November AV-162 2010 G37 Sedan


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681631

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction factor
SULT-III C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
[U1010]
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-163 2010 G37 Sedan


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681632

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
Cont Unit
U1200 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1200]
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-164 2010 G37 Sedan


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681648

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
CAN CONT C
U1216 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1216]
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-165 2010 G37 Sedan


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681683

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Adjust the predictive course line cen-
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the
U1232 ter position of the steering angle sen-
[1232] steering angle sensor is incomplete.
sor.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681684

1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.

>> Adjusts the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit)
side. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION :
Special Repair Requirement".

Revision: 2009 November AV-166 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005857583

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected:
• Display unit power supply and C
• display unit power supply and ground circuit are mal-
FRONT DISP CONN ground circuit.
U1243 functioning.
[U1243] • Communication circuit between AV
• communication circuit between AV control unit and dis-
control unit and display unit.
play unit are malfunctioning. D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857584

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT E

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-173, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. H

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals I
11 51
M71 M202 Existed
22 39
J
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit K
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M71 Not existed L
22
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. AV
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
O

Revision: 2009 November AV-167 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 11 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 22 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-168 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005857585

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
When either one of the following items is detected: C
and ground circuit.
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit are
• Communication circuit between AV
malfunctioning.
SAT CONN control unit and satellite radio tun-
U1255 • communication circuits between AV control unit and
[U1255] er. D
satellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
• Request signal circuit between AV
• request signal circuit between AV control unit and sat-
control unit and satellite radio tun-
ellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
er.
E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857586

1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F


Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-174, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector.
I
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner


Continuity J
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
129 8
M206 122 B236 10 Existed K
130 9
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector.
L

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals M
129 Ground
M206 122 Not existed
130
AV

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector. P
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals

Revision: 2009 November AV-169 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
129 Ground 7.0 V
M206
130 Ground 7.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
Satellite radio tuner (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B236 10 Ground 7.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-208, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-170 2010 G37 Sedan


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681705

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
D
When either one of the following items is detected: • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U1240 • SWITCH CONN E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
and multifunction switch are malfunctioning. switch.
When either one of the following items is detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuits are F
U1300 [U1300] ground circuits.
malfunctioning.
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN • AV communication circuits between
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit
[U1256] AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
and TEL adapter unit are malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
G
[U1300]
U1300
• SWITCH CONN Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be- AV communication circuits between AV
U1240
[U1240] tween AV control unit and multifunction switch. control unit and multifunction switch. H
U1256
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-171 2010 G37 Sedan


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005681706

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace AV control unit. If the mal-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 function occurs constantly.
[U1310] circuit.
Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-172 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857587
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
C
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
D
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
G
Battery power supply M201 19 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M201 7 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground. J

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M201 20 OFF Existed K

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857588
M

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)


AV
Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
O
Inverter VCC 2
M71 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 3
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and AV control unit harness connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-173 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Signal name Display unit (M71) AV control unit (M202) Continuity


Inverter VCC 2 48 Existed
Signal VCC 3 36 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Display unit (M71) — Continuity


Inverter VCC 2 Ground Not existed
Signal VCC 3 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Inverter VCC 48
M202 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 36
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replacement of AV control unit.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M71 1 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857589

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-174 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) A
Battery power supply B236 12 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply B236 16 ACC Battery voltage
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.
C
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857590

D
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
E
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
F
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
H
Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
I
Battery power supply B237 1 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply B237 2 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between TEL adapter unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. L

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground B237 4, 14 OFF Existed M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
AV
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-175 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681727

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681728

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 17 M202 43 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 17 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 17 Ground
selecting “Color Spec-
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-176 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681730

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681731

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 6 M202 44 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 6 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL I
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

L
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 6 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ
AV
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View". O

Revision: 2009 November AV-177 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681733

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681734

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 18 M202 45 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 18 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 18 Ground
selecting “Color Spec-
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-178 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681745

Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with B
AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681746

C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 19 M202 42 Existed
F
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit G
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 19 Not existed
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
I
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+) K
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal
L

M
M71 19 Ground

AV
SKIB3603E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View". O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-179 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681747

Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681748

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 9 M202 40 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 9 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
Display unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V

M71 9 Ground At camera image is dis-


played.

PKIB4948J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-180 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005744653

• AV control unit outputs camera power supply to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image signal B
from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the display
unit.
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005744654

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector. E

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
M203 73 B305 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
G

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground H
M203 73 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY J
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
K
4. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
L
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M203 73 Ground Shift position is “R”. 6.0 V M
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View". AV

3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.
P
AV control unit Rear view camera
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M203 62 B305 3 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-181 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M203 62 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

At rear view camera im-


M203 62 Ground
age is displayed.

SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-217, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-182 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681749

AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the composite image signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681750

1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and display unit harness connector. D

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M202 47 M71 15 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. F

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M202 47 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL I
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

At camera image is dis-


M202 47 Ground
played. M

SKIB2251J
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View". O

Revision: 2009 November AV-183 2010 G37 Sedan


HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681751

In composite image (AUX image and camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and hori-
zontal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681752

1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 8 M202 38 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 8 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal

M71 8 Ground

SKIB3601E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-184 2010 G37 Sedan


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681753

In composite image (AUX image and camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and hori- B
zontal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681754 C

1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
Display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 20 M202 50 Existed F

4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.


G
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 20 Not existed H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I

2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL


1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal L

M
M71 20 Ground

AV
SKIB3598E

Is the inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-185 2010 G37 Sedan


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681757

The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681758

1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Multifunction switch AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M72 14 M204 96 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Multifunction switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M72 14 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Pressing the eject switch 0V
M204 96 Ground
Except for above 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace preset switch. Refer to AV-211, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-186 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681765

Supply power from TEL adapter unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the micro- B
phone.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681766

C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TEL ADAPTER UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.

TEL adapter unit Microphone E


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
7 1
F
B237 8 R17 2 Existed
29 4
4. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. G

TEL adapter unit


Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
7
M237 Not existed
29 I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. J
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect TEL adapter unit connector.
K
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector.

L
(+) (−)
Voltage
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
B237 29 B237 8 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
NO >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-187 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

(+) (−)
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

B237 7 B237 8 give a voice.

PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-214, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-188 2010 G37 Sedan


CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005681767

TEL adapter unit identifies the vehicle model according to the control signal and performs the control. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681768

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. D

TEL adapter unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminals
Ground
23
B237 Existed
24 F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair harness or connector. G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-189 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681775

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681776

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 6 M36 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 6 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 6 M201 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-190, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005681777

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-190 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-191 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681779

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681780

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 16 M36 31 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 16 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 16 M201 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-192, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005681782

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-192 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-193 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005681784

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005681785

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 15 M36 33 Existed
3. Connect AV control unit connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-194, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005681787

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-194 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-195 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005681789

OPERATION

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take


• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit.
• All switches cannot be operated. • AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system multifunction switch.
selection screen when the CON- Perform “Self diagnosis Result” of “MULTI AV” with
SULT-III is started. CONSULT-III. Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-173, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Per-
Only specified switch cannot be operat- form multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagno-
ed. sis function. Refer to AV-112, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-
III self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set- tion".
ting operation is abnormal. There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
nosis results.
Ignition signal circuit malfunction. (AV control unit)
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion".

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


Simple Check for Bluetooth™ Communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction.
1. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
4. When operated Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone,
check if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name.
(If other Bluetooth™ device is located near cellular phone, a
name of the device would be displayed also.)
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
JPNIA0441GB

Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Revision: 2009 November AV-196 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (No con- TEL adapter unit malfunction.
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
nection is displayed on the dis- Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
B
play at the guide.)
• Perform “Self diagnosis Result” of “MULTI AV” with
CONSULT-III. Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion". C
• No malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be Both the reception and the speech cannot
TEL adapter unit malfunction.
established. be performed
Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
• Malfunction is detected.
D
Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".

The operation of the “ ” switch can TEL voice signal circuit malfunction between TEL adapt- E
The other party's voice cannot be performed. er unit and AV control unit.
be heard by hands-free phone.
The operation of the “ ” switch can- Control signal circuit.
not be performed. F
TEL adapter unit.
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.
Refer to AV-216, "Exploded View".
by the other party with hands- G
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-187, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check steering switch.
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, and “MENU Refer to AV-190, "Component Inspection". H
DOWN” switches are operated. But “ • Malfunction is detected.
” switch is not operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-212, "Exploded
The system cannot be operat- View".
I
ed. “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
and “ ” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".

All steering switches do not work.


Steering switch ground circuit malfunction. J
Refer to AV-194, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO RGB IMAGE


K
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis. L
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".
tion".
RGB image is not shown.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III M
self-diagnosis results. Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit.
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-185, "Diagnosis Procedure".
tion".
AV
RGB signal (R: red) circuit.
Light blue (Cyan) tint.
Refer to AV-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Color of RGB image is not RGB signal (G: green) circuit.
Purple (Magenta) tint. O
proper. Refer to AV-177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit.
Screen looks yellowish.
Refer to AV-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB synchronizing signal circuit. P
RGB screen is rolling. —
Refer to AV-179, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO AUDIO

Revision: 2009 November AV-197 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take


Disk eject signal circuit. Refer to AV-186, "Diagnosis Pro-
The disk cannot be removed. —
cedure".
AV control unit malfunction.
No sound from all speakers.
Audio sound is not heard. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded View".
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signals circuit of suspect system.
Perform the following inspection procedure.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for
self-diagnosis results. looseness.
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- NOTE:
tion". Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.)
Satellite radio is not received. 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".
tion".
The sound of satellite radio is Satellite radio sound signal circuit between AV control unit
Other audio sounds are normal.
not heard. and satellite radio tuner.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
It does not change to satellite self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
radio mode. Refer to AV-121, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-132, "DTC Index".
tion".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna feeder.

RELATED TO USB
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take

iPod® or USB memory can not —


• USB harness malfunction.
be recognized. • USB connector malfunction.

iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Probable malfunction location


Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-194, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check steering switch.
Refer to AV-190, "Component Inspection".
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
• Malfunction is detected.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-212, "Exploded View".

“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” and “ ” Steering switch signal A circuit.
switches are not operated. Refer to AV-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".

”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN” and “ ” switches are not operat- Steering switch signal B circuit.
ed. Refer to AV-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO CAMERA
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Revision: 2009 November AV-198 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


• Camera image signal circuit.
Camera image is not shown.
Refer to AV-181, "Diagnosis Procedure".
(Vehicle width and possible —
• Composite image signal circuit.
route line is displayed.) B
Refer to AV-183, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“Reverse” is not turned ON on “Vehicle
Signals” screen of “Confirmation/Adjust- Reverse signal circuit malfunction.
ment”. C
Camera image does not switch.
“Reverse” is turned ON on “Vehicle Sig- AV control unit malfunction.
nals” screen of “Confirmation/Adjust- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-202, "Exploded
ment”. View". D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-199 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000005681791

BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The systems in the video mode. Press “DISC-AUX” to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Press “ OFF” to turn on the display.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.

RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION


Related to Telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interfer-
ence, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A) or
could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Revision: 2009 November AV-200 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

Symptom Cause and Counter measure A


Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
B
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. C
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A files on a CD, only
the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” D
cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the E
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A writing applications or other text editing applica-
tions.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. F
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Discs recorded in live file system format are not supported. (For Microsoft Windows Vista, check
the settings.) G
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A CD, or if it is a multisession disc,
the music starts playing. some time may be required before the music starts playing. H
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data. I
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”,
Move immediately to the next song
“.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
when playing
player will skip to the next song. J
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other K
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking L
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
M

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-201 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681812

CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-159, "Description".
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JPNIA0200ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket LH 3. AV control unit


4. Bracket RH

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681813

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-159, "Description".
1. Remove display unit. Refer to AV-203, "Exploded View".
2. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be
careful not to insert them wrongly.
• Be sure to perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” when replacing AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-202 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681814

Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T B
models).
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681815

C
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models). D
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION E
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-203 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681956

JSNIA0164ZZ

1. Front door speaker


2. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681957

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the front door speaker from speaker bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-204 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681958

D
JSNIA0165ZZ

E
1. Rear door speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681959


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove rear door speaker from rear door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. H

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-205 2010 G37 Sedan


TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
TWEETER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681960

JSNIA0166ZZ

1. Door finisher
2. Tweeter

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681961

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the tweeter from the front door finisher.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-206 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ANTENNA AMP.
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681830

D
JSNIA0123ZZ

E
1. AM-FM main connector
2. Antenna amp.
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681831

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove rear pillar finisher LH. Refer to INT-15, "Exploded View".
2. Remove antenna amp. from rear pillar LH.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-207 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681832

JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681833

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View".
3. Remove screws (A) from inside the cabin, and remove TEL
adapter unit and TEL antenna as a single unit from trunk room
side.
4. Remove bracket screws and remove TEL adapter unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-208 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681842

D
JSNIA0124ZZ

E
1. Satellite radio antenna
: Vehicle front
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681843

REMOVAL G
1. Remove head lining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT-
24, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" (normal roof models) or INT-27, "SUNROOF : Exploded View"
(sunroof models).
H
2. Remove nut, and then remove satellite radio antenna from roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. I

Satellite radio antenna mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION: J
Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof
panel may be deformed, when satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.
K

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-209 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681844

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0126ZZ

1. Center ventilator grille


2. Multifunction switch

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681845

REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove multi function switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multi function switch from center ventilator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-210 2010 G37 Sedan


PRESET SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
PRESET SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681846

REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY C

JPNIA0201ZZ H

1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch


I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681847

REMOVAL
J
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove preset switch screws (A), (B), and (C), and then K
remove preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.

1. Clock
L

JSNIA0127ZZ
AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: O
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-211 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681848

Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681849

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-212 2010 G37 Sedan


USB CONNECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
USB CONNECTOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681856

D
JPNIA1789ZZ

E
1. USB connector

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681857


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-38, "M/T G
MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Push the pawl from the back of center console to remove USB connector.
INSTALLATION H
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-213 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
MICROPHONE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681858

REMOVAL
Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0132ZZ

1. Microphone

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681859

REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View".
2. Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-214 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
TEL ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681862

G
JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)
H

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681863

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View". J
3. Remove screws and clip (A) from inside the cabin and remove
TEL antenna (1) connector from trunk room side.
K

M
JSNIA0159ZZ

INSTALLATION AV
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-215 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681864

JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681865

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View".
3. Remove screws (A) from inside the cabin, and remove TEL
adapter unit and TEL antenna as a single unit from trunk room
side.
4. Remove bracket screws and remove TEL adapter unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-216 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005681866

REMOVAL B
Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C

JSNIA0134ZZ
F
1. Rear view camera

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005681867 G

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher outer. Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove rear view camera from trunk lid finisher outer.
INSTALLATION
I
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005681964

J
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle, K
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust Guide Lines” mode of “Confirmation/Adjust-
ment” mode. L

AV

SKIB3691E

Revision: 2009 November AV-217 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle.

Selected pattern :7
4. Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is
aligned with the guiding line. Press “OK” switch and record the
adjusted guiding line position to the AV control unit.
JSNIA2231ZZ
Up/Down adjustment range : 20° to 20°
Left/Right adjustment range : 20° to 20°
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.

Revision: 2009 November AV-218 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005688677

REMOVAL B
Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C

JSNIA0135ZZ
F
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
G
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005688678

REMOVAL H
1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
I
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUST- J
MENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
• Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRAL
POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description". K

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-219 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO WITH REAR VIEW CAMERA]
ANTENNA FEEDER
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000005681871

JSNIA2879GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-220 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005719737

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000005621375

K
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. L
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000005621376 M

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line AV
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: 2009 November AV-221 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Revision: 2009 November AV-222 2010 G37 Sedan


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000005660872
B

Tool Description
C

D
Power tool Loosening screws

E
PBIC0191E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-223 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005660924

JSNIA2599ZZ

1. Center speaker 2. Tweeter LH 3. Front door squawker LH


4. Front door woofer LH 5. Rear door speaker LH 6. Antenna amp.
7. BOSE amp. 8. Rear woofer 9. TEL antenna
10. Rear view camera 11. TEL adapter unit 12. Satellite radio tuner
13. Rear door speaker RH 14. Satellite radio antenna 15. Front door woofer RH
16. Front door squawker RH 17. Tweeter RH 18. Microphone
19. Sonar control unit 20. Steering switch 21. Steering angle sensor
22. Preset switch 23. USB connector 24. AV control unit
25. Multifunction switch 26. Display unit
Lower part of rear parcel shelf (on the Lower part of rear parcel shelf (on the
A. Within rear pillar finisher LH B. C.
left side) right side)

Revision: 2009 November AV-224 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Instrument driver lower panel re-
D. E. Spiral cable removed condition
moved condition A
: Vehicle front

Component Description INFOID:0000000005660925


B

Part name Description


C
• Integrates flash memory allowing music data to be stored.
• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication sig-
nals from the AV control unit. D
• The AV control unit includes the audio, USB connection and vehicle information
functions.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
AV control unit to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. E
• It is connected to the steering angle sensor and receives the steering angle sensor
signal via CAN communication.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and park- F
ing brake).
• Amp. ON signal, sound signal and mode change signal transmitted to BOSE amp.
• TEL voice signal and voice guidance signal are input from TEL adapter unit.
G
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit and
operates.
Display unit • RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB image, RGB area and RGB H
synchronizing).
• Composite image signals are input from AV control unit.
• Synchronizing signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
I
• Inputs sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to each speak-
BOSE amp. er.
• Input mode change signal from AV control unit.
J
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Front door woofer
• Outputs low range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Front door squawker K
• Outputs mid range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Rear door speaker
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
L
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Tweeter
• Outputs high range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Center speaker M
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Rear woofer • Outputs low-pitched sound.
• Power (woofer amp. ON signal) is supplied from BOSE amp. AV
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio operations
are integrated.
Multifunction switch
• Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV
O
control unit via AV communication.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air con-
ditioner, etc. operations are integrated.
Preset switch • Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted P
to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Camera power supply is input from AV control unit.
Rear view camera
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to AV control unit.
It is connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle sensor signal
Steering angle sensor
via CAN communication.

Revision: 2009 November AV-225 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Part name Description
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit.
Sonar control unit
• Trouble diagnosis is supported with CONSULT-III (K-LINE).
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone and voice control, etc. are possible.
Steering switch
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition.
Microphone • Microphone signal is transmitted to AV control unit.
• Power (Microphone VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control
Antenna amp. unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the sound
signal to the AV control unit.
Satellite radio tuner
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communication
signal and request signal).
Satellite radio antenna Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to the AV control unit.
TEL adapter unit • It is connected with the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled with
the AV control unit.
TEL antenna Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to the TEL adapter unit.
USB connector Image signal*1 and sound signal of USB input is transmitted to AV control unit.

*1: Image signals cannot be received from iPod®.

Revision: 2009 November AV-226 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYSTEM
A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005661197
B

J
JSNIA2602GB

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION K
SWITCH virtually.
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005657491

L
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

FUNCTION NAME M
Audio function
Hands-free phone function
AV
Rear view monitor function
Sonar function
Vehicle information function O
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV P
communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information.
• AV control unit is connected with display and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of
display and display control and receives the response signal from display.

Revision: 2009 November AV-227 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
AUDIO FUNCTION
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated with multifunction switch,
preset switch, steering switch. Operation status of audio is indicated at display.

FUNCTION
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
Music Box (flash memory)
USB connection function
Driver's Audio Stage

Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
Screen Display
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between display unit and AV control unit.
• The image signal to display operating condition is performed with RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
RGB image synchronizing signal.
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV
control unit. Audio signal is input to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to each speaker.
Satellite Radio Mode
• Satellite radio tuner is controlled by communication signal and request signal with AV control unit.
• Sound signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna and transmitted to AV control unit. AV control
unit is output the sound signal (satellite radio) to each speaker.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to each speaker when CD is
inserted to AV control unit.
Music Box Mode
• Music CD data is stored on flash memory that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played.
• AV control unit outputs music (sound signal) that is stored on flash memory to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp.
outputs to each speaker.
USB Connection Function
• iPod or music files in USB memory can be played.
• iPod sound signals are transmitted from USB connector to the AV control unit and to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB connector.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTE:
Use the enclosed USB harness when connecting iPod® to USB connector.
Driver's Audio Stage
• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to
be the center of sounds.
• ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using mode
change signal.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and TEL adapter unit is performed with Bluetooth™ communication.

Revision: 2009 November AV-228 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
• The voice guidance signal is input from the TEL adapter unit to the AV control unit and output via BOSE
amp. to the front speaker when operating the cellular phone. A
• TEL adapter unit has the on board self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-242, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
When A Call Is Originated
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to TEL adapter unit. B
• TEL adapter unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal.
• Voice sound is then heard at the other party.
When Receiving A Call C
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party.
• TEL voice signal is input to TEL adapter unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output via BOSE amp. to front speaker. D

REAR VIEW MONITOR FUNCTION


• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.
E
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the AV control unit when power is supplied from the AV
control unit.
• The AV control unit transmits a warning message, fixed guide lines, and predictive course lines to the display
unit by RGB image signal. Rear view monitor images are displayed by combining the RGB image signal and F
the camera image signals from the rear view camera.
• Predictive course lines are controlled by a steering angle sensor signal received the AV control unit via CAN
communication.
G
SONAR SYSTEM
For further information about the sonar system, refer to SN-7, "System Description".
VEHICLE INFORMATION FUNCTION H
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy and maintenance are displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication
from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. I
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings
function.
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-229 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005661198

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000005657492

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION


The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch cannot be checked.

JSNIA0136GB

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode


Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display unit.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
control unit and each unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-230 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar
Display Diagnosis
display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals B
lights, ignition and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
C
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment D
• Guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be ad-
Camera Cont. justed.
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored. E
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be mon-
AV COMM Diagnosis
itored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history. F
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.

METHOD OF STARTING G
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
H
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed I
by pressing “BACK” button.

K
JSNIA2584ZZ

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the


items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be L
selected.

AV

SKIB3961E
O
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
P
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.

Revision: 2009 November AV-231 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction Note Red Green

NOTE: JSNIA2619ZZ
Control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined
according to the following order of priority: red > gray.

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a


component in the diagnosis result screen.

JSNIA0141GB

Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode


• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to


Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit
Control unit function in those components, replace AV
power supply and ground circuits.
control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded
View".

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow.

Revision: 2009 November AV-232 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Possible malfunction location / Action to A


Area with yellow connection lines Description
take
Malfunction is detected in serial communi-
Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and display unit. B
display unit.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and C
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV con- • Communication circuit between AV con-
Control unit ⇔ SAT
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
functioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
D
• request signal circuit between AV control trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
unit and satellite radio tuner are malfunc-
tioning. E
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
ground circuits. F
Control unit ⇔ Sonar ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit.
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.
G
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
ground circuits. H
Control unit ⇔ BTHF ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
I
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted. J
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust- K
ment Mode screen.

M
JSNIA0147GB

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-233 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Display Diagnosis

JSNIA2233GB

Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

JSNIA0149GB

Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position

Revision: 2009 November AV-234 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks
A
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever other than
OFF B
“R” position

Speaker Test
Select “Speaker Test” to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. C
Press “Start” to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press “Start” again
to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press “End” to stop the
test tones.
D

JSNIA0150GB
F
Climate Control
Refer to “HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM” for details.
Error History G
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned H
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
I
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if J
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
K
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
L
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.

Display type of occur- M


Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-235 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JSNIA0151GB

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Function".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) tion occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
Predictive course line center position ad- Adjust the predictive course line center po-
Steer. Angle Sensor Calibration justment of the steering angle sensor is in- sition of the steering angle sensor.
complete. Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Function".
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground cir-
circuits.
Front Display Connection Error cuits are malfunctioning.
• Communication circuits between AV con-
• communication circuits between AV con-
trol unit and display unit.
trol unit and display unit are malfunction-
ing.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV con- • Communication circuit between AV con-
XM Connection Error
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
functioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
• request signal circuit between AV control trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
unit and satellite radio tuner are malfunc-
tioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.

Revision: 2009 November AV-236 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning. B
• Sonar Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit.
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items is
C
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning. D
• H/F Unit Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT E
Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
• Switches Connection Error AV communication circuits between AV
tion circuits between AV control unit and
• Sonar Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch.
multifunction switch are malfunctioning.
• H/F Unit Connection Error
F
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Correct Draw Line of Rear view Cam”, “Con-
firm Configuration” are available. G

JSNIA2230ZZ
J
Adjust Offset of Rear view Camera
• Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor K
camera.

JSNIA2231ZZ

AV
Factory Configuration Confirmation
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.
O

JSNIA2234ZZ

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis

Revision: 2009 November AV-237 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA2235ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(BCM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(VDC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(STRG) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JPNIA1827ZZ
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(BTHF-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Sonar-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)

JSNIA0154GB

Initialize Settings

Revision: 2009 November AV-238 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
“User Data Initialization” and “Accessory Number Initialization” are
possible. A
CAUTION:
• Never perform Accessory Number Initialization except when
configuration is unsuccessful.
B
• Accessory Number Initialization requires configuration. For
details, refer to AV-284, "Description".

JSNIA2237ZZ

D
CONSULT - III Function INFOID:0000000005657493

APPLICATION ITEMS E
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.

Diagnosis mode Description


F
Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
G
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
Work Support Steering angle sensor can be adjusted.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. H
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.

AV Communication
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed. I

Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter. J
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
K
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively. L
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
M
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


AV
CAN communication malfunction is de-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-286, "Diagnosis Procedure".
tected.
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is de- O
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
tected.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] tion occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View". P
Cont Unit [U1200]
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN CONT [U1216]
Adjust the predictive course line center
Predictive course line center position ad- position of the steering angle sensor.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [U1232] justment of the steering angle sensor is in- Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUA-
complete. TOR NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUST-
MENT : Description".

Revision: 2009 November AV-239 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground
circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] circuits are malfunctioning.
• Communication circuits between AV
• communication circuits between AV
control unit and display unit.
control unit and display unit are mal-
functioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and • Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuit are malfunctioning. ground circuit.
• communication circuits between AV • Communication circuit between AV con-
SAT CONN [U1255]
control unit and satellite radio tuner are trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
malfunctioning. • Request signal circuit between AV con-
• request signal circuit between AV con- trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
trol unit and satellite radio tuner are mal-
functioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• SONAR CONN [U125C] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit.
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
Malfunction is detected in AV communica-
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV communication circuits between AV
tion circuits between AV control unit and
• SONAR CONN [U125C] control unit and multifunction switch.
multifunction switch.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256]

DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks


On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.

Revision: 2009 November AV-240 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks
A
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor B
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
On Ignition switch ON C
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is D
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than R

SELECTION FROM MENU E


Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals.

F
Item to be selected Description
VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG G
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
H
REV SIG

WORK SUPPORT
Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. I
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side. J
Item Description
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
K
CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.
L
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration. M
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-241 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000005657494

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS


During on board diagnosis the diagnosis function of TEL adapter unit starts with the operation of the steering
switch and performs the diagnosis when ignition switch ACC.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
The on board diagnosis has 3 modes: the self-diagnosis mode that performs the trouble diagnosis, the
speaker adaptation data deleting mode and the hands-free phone system initialization mode.
CAUTION:
• Perform the diagnosis with the vehicle stopped.
• Perform STEP2 if necessary.

STEP MODE Description


The self-diagnosis mode performs the microphone test and
the diagnosis of TEL adapter unit, TEL antenna and steering
STEP1 Self-diagnosis
unit, and then reads out the results with the sound and indi-
cates them on the display.
The speaker adaptation data deleting mode can delete the
Speaker adaptation data deleting
speaker adaptation data.
STEP2
Hands-free phone system initialization mode can perform
Hands-free phone system initialization
the initialization of hands-free phone system.

Self-diagnosis results
Self-diagnosis mode reads out the self-diagnosis results.
NOTE:
• Error count is read out simultaneously when reading out the DTC name.
• The errors are read out continuously when some errors occur at the same time.
Self-diagnosis results
DTC DTC name Possible causes
DTC 10000 INTERNAL FAILURE TEL adapter unit
DTC 01000 ANT. SHORT TO BATT OR OPEN
TEL antenna
DTC 00100 ANT. SHORT TO GROUND
DTC 00010 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK A
Steering switch
DTC 00001 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK B
DTC 00000 THERE ARE NO FAILURE RECORDS TO REPORT —

The Details of Error Count


The error count guides “0” when the error occurs. The next time it counts up “1” if it is normal with the ignition
switch ON. It continues the count up unless the initialization of hands-free phone system is performed.

Revision: 2009 November AV-242 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
FLOW CHART OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A

AV

JSNIA2498GB
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-243 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858723

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On


VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off

Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On


PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off

Ignition switch Light switch ON On


ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC

Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On


REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA2830ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing SOURCE
0V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU UP
0.7 V
switch.
Ignition
6 15 Keep pressing MENU
Steering switch signal A Input switch 1.3 V
(P) (B) DOWN switch.
ON
Keep pressing 2.0 V
switch
Except for above. 3.3 V

Revision: 2009 November AV-244 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
ACC
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V C
9
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
OFF
Keep pressing VOL DOWN D
0V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing VOL UP
16 15 0.7 V
Steering switch signal B Input switch switch.
(L) (B) E
ON
Keep pressing switch. 1.3 V

Except for above. 3.3 V


Ignition F
18
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(G)
ON
Ignition G
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition H
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
36 I
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(BG)
ACC
Ignition
37
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V J
(LG)
OFF

K
Ignition
38 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON L

SKIB3601E

Ignition
39 Communication signal When adjusting display AV
Ground Input switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J O
At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V

P
Ignition
40
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) At DVD image is displayed.
ON

PKIB4948J

41 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-245 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
42
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
43
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(G)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1029ZZ

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
44
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(L)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1030ZZ

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
45
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(P)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1031ZZ

Ignition
46
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON

Ignition
47 At rear view camera image
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(BR) is displayed.
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
48
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
49
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
OFF

Revision: 2009 November AV-246 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
50 Vertical synchronizing (VP) C
Ground Input switch —
(G) signal
ON

SKIB3598E D

E
Ignition
51 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
F
PKIB5039J

52
— Shield — — — — G
(B)
57 — Shield — — — —
58 — Shield — — — —
H

Ignition I
62 At rear view camera image
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(W) is displayed.
ON

J
SKIB2251J

71 — Shield — — — —
Ignition K
72
Ground Camera ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON

73
Ignition
At rear view camera image
L
Ground Camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(R) is displayed.
ON
76 AV communication signal Input/
— — — — M
(LG) (L) Output
77 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
AV
78 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
79 AV communication signal Input/
(SB)

(H) Output
— — — O
80 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
P
81 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
Ignition
82
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
86 — Shield — — — —

Revision: 2009 November AV-247 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition During voice guide output


87 88
TEL voice signal Input switch with the switch
(L) (P)
ON pressed.

SKIB3609E

NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Ignition
92 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON

JSNIA0012GB

Parking brake is ON. 0V

Ignition
93
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(SB) Parking brake is OFF.
ON

JSNIA0007GB

Ignition R position 12.0 V


94
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(BG) Other than R position 0V
ON
Ignition
95
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
96
Ground Disk eject signal Input switch
(V) Except for above. 3.3 V
ON

Ignition
108 114
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output
(BR) (Y)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
109 115
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(R) (G)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-248 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
110
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(GR)
ON
111 C
— Shield — — — —
(B)

D
Ignition
112 118
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output
(V) (LG)
ON E

SKIB3609E

Ignition
113 119
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output G
(O) (W)
ON

SKIB3609E H

I
Ignition
120 124 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(B) (W) LH is selected.
ON
J
SKIB3609E

Ignition
121 125 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(G) (R) RH is selected. L
ON

SKIB3609E
M

Ignition AV
122 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(L) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON

O
SKIA9301J

126 — Shield — — — —
127 — Shield — — — — P
Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V
128
Ground Mode change signal Output switch
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-249 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
129 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9299J

Ignition
130 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(G) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON

SKIA9300J

132
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
133
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R)
134
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W)
135
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
136 — Shield — — — —
137 — FM sub Input — — —
138 — AM-FM MAIN Input — — —
Ignition
139 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
ACC

DTC Index INFOID:0000000005657499

SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

DTC Display item Refer to


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-286, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-287, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Cont Unit [U1200] AV-288, "DTC Logic"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-289, "DTC Logic"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-290, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-291, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1255 SAT CONN [U1255] AV-293, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-296, "DTC Logic"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-295, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-295, "Description"
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]

Revision: 2009 November AV-250 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DTC Display item Refer to
A
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-295, "Description"
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240] B
AV-295, "Description"
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
C

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-251 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858724

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JPNIA0006ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(BG)
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
6
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(L)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1030ZZ

7 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Output switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Revision: 2009 November AV-252 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V B

9
Ignition C
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(B) At DVD image is displayed.
ON

D
PKIB4948J

Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness. F
ON

PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
H
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
I

Ignition
15 At rear view camera image J
Ground Composite image signal Input switch
(BR) is displayed.
ON

SKIB2251J K

Start Confirmation/Adjust- L
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
17
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(G)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen. M
JSNIA1029ZZ

AV
Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
18
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(P) O
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1031ZZ
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-253 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(W)
ON

SKIB3603E

Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Output switch —
(G) signal
On

SKIB3598E

21 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
22 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

23
— Shield — — — —
(B)

Revision: 2009 November AV-254 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BOSE AMP.
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858729

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

JSNIA0760ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output G

H
Ignition
1 2
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(L) (W)
ON
I
SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 3
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(V) (LG) K
ON

SKIB3609E
L

Ignition M
5 6 Sound signal door woofer
Output switch Sound output
(G) (R) RH
ON

AV
SKIB3609E

Ignition
7
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B) O
ON
Ignition
10
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF P
Ignition
11
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-255 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
14 9 Sound signal front door
Output switch Sound output
(B) (W) woofer LH
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
16 17
Sound signal woofer Output switch Sound output
(SB) (V)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
18 19 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Sound output
(L) (P) speaker LH
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
20
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — 10.0 V
(W)
ACC
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
22
Ground Woofer Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(GR)
ACC

Ignition
24 23
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Sound output
(V) (SB)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
26 25
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Sound output
(BR) (Y)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-256 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak- C
Output switch Sound output
(L) (BG) er
ON

SKIB3609E D

E
Ignition
31 32 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Sound output
(LG) (Y) speaker RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E

Ignition
33 34
Sound signal front RH Input switch Sound output
(R) (G)
ON
H

SKIB3609E
I

Ignition J
35 36
Sound signal front LH Input switch Sound output
(P) (L)
ON

K
SKIB3609E

Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V


37
Ground Mode change signal Input switch
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V L
ON

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-257 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858725

JPNIA0010ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output

Ignition
2 1 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(R) (G) LH is selected.
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 3 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Output switch
(B) (W) RH is selected
ON

SKIB3609E

5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
8 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(G) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON

SKIA9299J

Ignition
9 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(L) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON

SKIA9300J

Revision: 2009 November AV-258 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal Description
Reference value A
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output

Ignition
10 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(P) (CONT→SAT) is selected C
ON

SKIA9301J
D
Ignition
12
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
E
16
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG)
ACC
33 — Satellite antenna Input — — — F
34 — Shield — — — —

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-259 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005858726

JPNIA0011ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
2
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(LG)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG)
ON
Ignition
4
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
7
8 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(R)
ON

PKIB5037J

Ignition During voice guide output


9 10
TEL voice signal Output switch with the switch
(Y) (G)
ON pressed

SKIB3609E

Ignition
14
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
23
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-260 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
24
Ground Control signal Input switch — 0V
(B)
ON
NOTE: C
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Ignition
D
28 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(W) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
E

JSNIA0012GB
F
Ignition
29
8 Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(G)
ON
33 — TEL antenna Input — — — G
34 — Shield — — — —
35 AV communication signal Input/
— — — — H
(SB) (H) Output
36 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
I

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-261 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

WIRING DIAGRAM
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005657496

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.

JCNWM3730GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-262 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3731GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-263 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3732GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-264 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3733GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-265 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3734GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-266 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3735GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-267 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3736GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-268 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3737GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-269 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3738GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-270 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3739GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-271 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3740GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-272 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3741GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-273 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3742GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-274 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3743GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-275 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3744GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-276 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3745GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-277 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3746GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-278 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3747GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-279 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3748GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-280 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005681975
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Function".


• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-322, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: 2009 November AV-281 2010 G37 Sedan
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III
Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-322, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2009 November AV-282 2010 G37 Sedan


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
Description INFOID:0000000005657504

BEFORE REPLACEMENT B
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT-III configuration
before replacement.
AFTER REPLACEMENT C
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT-III.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order. D
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005657505 E

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


F
-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-284, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE: G
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View". I

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION J

-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-284, "Work Procedure". K

>> GO TO 4.
L
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal. M

>> WORK END


AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-283 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005657506

• Since vehicle specifications are not included in the AV control unit after replacement, it is required to write
vehicle specifications with CONSULT-III.
• Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005657507

NOTE:
If “WRITE CONFIGURATION” is unsuccessful, perform “Accessory Number Initialization”. For details, refer to
AV-230, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
After performing “Accessory Number Initialization”, reboot the AV control unit to perform “WRITE CONFIGU-
RATION”.
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of “MULTI AV”.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-CONFIG FILE”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file”.

>> WORK END


3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-MANUAL SELECTION”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit.
For data to write, refer to AV-284, "Configuration List".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal.

>> WORK END


Configuration List INFOID:0000000005843573

CAUTION:
Check vehicle specifications before servicing.

Revision: 2009 November AV-284 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

MANUAL SETTING ITEM A


NOTE
Items Setting value
LHD —
STEERING B
RHD —
SPORT premium grade
MODE 1
with 4WAS
C
SPORT premium grade
GRADE
MODE 3 2WD models without
4WAS
D
MODE 2 Except for above
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH — E
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
F

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-285 2010 G37 Sedan


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005658798

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-28, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005658799

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000]
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005658800

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-19, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-38, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2009 November AV-286 2010 G37 Sedan


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005658801

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction factor
SULT-III C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
[U1010]
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-287 2010 G37 Sedan


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005658802

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
Cont Unit
U1200 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1200]
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-288 2010 G37 Sedan


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005658803

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
CAN CONT C
U1216 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1216]
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-289 2010 G37 Sedan


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005660532

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Adjust the predictive course line cen-
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the
U1232 ter position of the steering angle sen-
[1232] steering angle sensor is incomplete.
sor.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660533

1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.

>> Adjusts the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit)
side. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION :
Special Repair Requirement".

Revision: 2009 November AV-290 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005660534

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected:
• Display unit power supply and C
• display unit power supply and ground circuit are mal-
FRONT DISP CONN ground circuit.
U1243 functioning.
[U1243] • Communication circuit between AV
• communication circuit between AV control unit and dis-
control unit and display unit.
play unit are malfunctioning. D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857212

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT E

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-297, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. H

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals I
11 51
M71 M202 Existed
22 39
J
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit K
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M71 Not existed L
22
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. AV
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
O

Revision: 2009 November AV-291 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 11 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M71 22 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-292 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005658651

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
When either one of the following items is detected: C
and ground circuit.
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit are
• Communication circuit between AV
malfunctioning.
SAT CONN control unit and satellite radio tun-
U1255 • communication circuits between AV control unit and
[U1255] er. D
satellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
• Request signal circuit between AV
• request signal circuit between AV control unit and sat-
control unit and satellite radio tun-
ellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
er.
E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005658652

1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F


Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-299, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector.
I
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner


Continuity J
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
129 8
M206 122 B236 10 Existed K
130 9
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector.
L

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals M
129 Ground
M206 122 Not existed
130
AV

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector. P
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals

Revision: 2009 November AV-293 2010 G37 Sedan


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
129 Ground 7.0 V
M206
130 Ground 7.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

(+)
Reference value
Satellite radio tuner (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B236 10 Ground 7.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-338, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-294 2010 G37 Sedan


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005657697

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
D
When either one of the following items is detected: • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U1240 • SWITCH CONN E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
and multifunction switch are malfunctioning. switch.
When either one of the following items are detected: • Sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• sonar control unit power supply and ground circuits are ground circuits. F
U1300 [U1300]
malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U125C • SONAR CONN
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and sonar control
[U125C]
and sonar control unit are malfunctioning. unit.
When either one of the following items is detected:
G
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • TEL adapter unit power supply and
• TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuits are
U1300 [U1300] ground circuits.
malfunctioning.
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN • AV communication circuits between
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit H
[U1256] AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
and TEL adapter unit are malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300 • SWITCH CONN I
U1240 [U1240] Malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits be- AV communication circuits between AV
U125C • SONAR CONN tween AV control unit and multifunction switch. control unit and multifunction switch.
U1256 [U125C] J
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-295 2010 G37 Sedan


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005660538

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace AV control unit. If the mal-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 function occurs constantly.
[U1310] circuit.
Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-296 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857214
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
C
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
D
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
G
Battery power supply M201 19 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M201 7 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground. J

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M201 20 OFF Existed K

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005857216
M

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)


AV
Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
O
Inverter VCC 2
M71 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 3
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M71 and AV control unit harness connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-297 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Signal name Display unit (M71) AV control unit (M202) Continuity


Inverter VCC 2 48 Existed
Signal VCC 3 36 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Display unit (M71) — Continuity


Inverter VCC 2 Ground Not existed
Signal VCC 3 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Inverter VCC 48
M202 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 36
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replacement of AV control unit.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M71 1 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660541

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 5, 8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply B42 10, 11 OFF Battery voltage

Revision: 2009 November AV-298 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
B
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
C
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground B42 7, 12 OFF Existed
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector. E
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621320
F
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
G
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
H
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
J
Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
K
Battery power supply B236 12 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply B236 16 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT M

TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621321

AV
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
O
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19 P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-299 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply B237 1 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply B237 2 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between TEL adapter unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground B237 4, 14 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-300 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660542

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660543

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 17 M202 43 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 17 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

L
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 17 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
AV
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View". O

Revision: 2009 November AV-301 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660866

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660545

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 6 M202 44 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 6 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 6 Ground
selecting “Color Spec-
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-302 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660867

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660547

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 18 M202 45 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 18 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

L
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
play color bar by
M71 18 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ
AV
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View". O

Revision: 2009 November AV-303 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660596

Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with
AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660597

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 19 M202 42 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 19 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal

M71 19 Ground

SKIB3603E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-304 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660598

Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display B
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660599

C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 9 M202 40 Existed
F
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit G
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 9 Not existed
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
I
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+) K
Reference value
Display unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
At RGB image is displayed. 5.0 V

M
M71 9 Ground At camera image is dis-
played.
AV

PKIB4948J

Is the inspection result normal? O


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-305 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005744644

• AV control unit outputs camera power supply to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image signal
from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the display
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005744645

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M203 73 B305 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M203 73 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M203 73 Ground Shift position is “R”. 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M203 62 B305 3 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-306 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

AV control unit A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M203 62 Not existed
B
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. C
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
E
(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
F

G
At rear view camera im-
M203 62 Ground
age is displayed.
H

SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal? I


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-347, "Exploded View".
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-307 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660600

AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the composite image signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660601

1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and display unit harness connector.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M202 47 M71 15 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M202 47 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

At camera image is dis-


M202 47 Ground
played.

SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-308 2010 G37 Sedan


HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660602

In composite image (AUX image and camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and hori- B
zontal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660603 C

1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
Display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 8 M202 38 Existed F

4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.


G
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 8 Not existed H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I

2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL


1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal L

M
M71 8 Ground

AV
SKIB3601E

Is the inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-309 2010 G37 Sedan


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660604

In composite image (AUX image and camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and hori-
zontal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660605

1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M71 20 M202 50 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 20 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal

M71 20 Ground

SKIB3598E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-310 2010 G37 Sedan


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660860

The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660861

1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Multifunction switch AV control unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M72 14 M204 96 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground. F

Multifunction switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M72 14 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE I
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
Voltage K
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Pressing the eject switch 0V
M204 96 Ground L
Except for above 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace preset switch. Refer to AV-341, "Exploded View". M
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-311 2010 G37 Sedan


MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660862

• AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp.


• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to
be the center of sounds.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660863

1.CHECK CONTINUITY MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

AV control unit BOSE amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M206 128 B41 37 Existed
4. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

BOSE amp.
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B41 37 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK MODE CHANGE SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BOSE amp. (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Driver's Audio Stage ON. 0V
B41 37 Ground
Driver's Audio Stage OFF. 8.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-336, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-312 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005660864

Supply power from TEL adapter unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the micro- B
phone.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005660865

C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TEL ADAPTER UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.

TEL adapter unit Microphone E


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
7 1
F
B237 8 R17 2 Existed
29 4
4. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. G

TEL adapter unit


Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
7
M237 Not existed
29 I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. J
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect TEL adapter unit connector.
K
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector.

L
(+) (−)
Voltage
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
B237 29 B237 8 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
NO >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-313 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

(+) (−)
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

B237 7 B237 8 give a voice.

PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-344, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-314 2010 G37 Sedan


CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005621342

TEL adapter unit identifies the vehicle model according to the control signal and performs the control. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621343

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. D

TEL adapter unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminals
Ground
23
B237 Existed
24 F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair harness or connector. G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-315 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005621350

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621351

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 6 M36 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 6 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 6 M201 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-316, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005621352

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-316 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-317 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660868

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621354

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 16 M36 31 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 16 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 16 M201 15 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-318, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005660870

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-318 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-319 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005660869

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005621357

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M201 15 M36 33 Existed
3. Connect AV control unit connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M201 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-320, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005660871

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-320 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω B
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω

Between terminals 15 and 17 C


switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω JSNIA0216GB

D
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-321 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005661200

OPERATION

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take


• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit.
• All switches cannot be operated. • AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system multifunction switch.
selection screen when the CON- Perform “Self diagnosis Result” of “MULTI AV” with
SULT-III is started. CONSULT-III. Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-297, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Per-
Only specified switch cannot be operat- form multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagno-
ed. sis function. Refer to AV-230, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-
III self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set- tion".
ting operation is abnormal. There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
nosis results.
Ignition signal circuit malfunction. (AV control unit)
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion".

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


Simple Check for Bluetooth™ Communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction.
1. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
4. When operated Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone,
check if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name.
(If other Bluetooth™ device is located near cellular phone, a
name of the device would be displayed also.)
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
JPNIA0441GB

Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Revision: 2009 November AV-322 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (No con- TEL adapter unit malfunction.
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
nection is displayed on the dis- Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
B
play at the guide.)
• Perform “Self diagnosis Result” of “MULTI AV” with
CONSULT-III. Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion". C
• No malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be Both the reception and the speech cannot
TEL adapter unit malfunction.
established. be performed
Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
• Malfunction is detected.
D
Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".

The operation of the “ ” switch can TEL voice signal circuit malfunction between TEL adapt- E
The other party's voice cannot be performed. er unit and AV control unit.
be heard by hands-free phone. Control signal circuit.
The operation of the “ ” switch can-
not be performed. Refer to AV-315, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
TEL adapter unit.
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.
Refer to AV-346, "Exploded View".
by the other party with hands- G
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-313, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check steering switch.
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, and “MENU Refer to AV-316, "Component Inspection". H
DOWN” switches are operated. But “ • Malfunction is detected.
” switch is not operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-342, "Exploded
The system cannot be operat- View".
I
ed. “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
and “ ” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-316, "Diagnosis Procedure".

All steering switches do not work.


Steering switch ground circuit malfunction. J
Refer to AV-320, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO RGB IMAGE


K
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis. L
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".
tion".
RGB image is not shown.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III M
self-diagnosis results. Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit.
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-310, "Diagnosis Procedure".
tion".
AV
RGB signal (R: red) circuit.
Light blue (Cyan) tint.
Refer to AV-301, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Color of RGB image is not RGB signal (G: green) circuit.
Purple (Magenta) tint. O
proper. Refer to AV-302, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit.
Screen looks yellowish.
Refer to AV-303, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB synchronizing signal circuit. P
RGB screen is rolling. —
Refer to AV-304, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO AUDIO

Revision: 2009 November AV-323 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take


Disk eject signal circuit. Refer to AV-311, "Diagnosis Pro-
The disk cannot be removed. —
cedure".
• Amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits malfunc-
No sound from all speakers.
tion. Refer to AV-298, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Audio sound is not heard. • Sound signal woofer circuit between BOSE amp. and
rear woofer.
Sound is not heard from rear woofer.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit between BOSE amp.
and rear woofer.
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signals circuit of suspect system.
Perform the following inspection procedure.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for
self-diagnosis results. looseness.
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- NOTE:
tion". Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.)
Satellite radio is not received. 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".
tion".
The sound of satellite radio is Satellite radio sound signal circuit between AV control unit
Other audio sounds are normal.
not heard. and satellite radio tuner.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
It does not change to satellite self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
radio mode. Refer to AV-239, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-250, "DTC Index".
tion".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna feeder.

RELATED TO USB
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take

iPod® or USB memory can not —


• USB harness malfunction.
be recognized. • USB connector malfunction.

iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Probable malfunction location


Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-320, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check steering switch.
Refer to AV-316, "Component Inspection".
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
• Malfunction is detected.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-342, "Exploded View".

“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” and “ ” Steering switch signal A circuit.
switches are not operated. Refer to AV-316, "Diagnosis Procedure".

”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN” and “ ” switches are not operat- Steering switch signal B circuit.
ed. Refer to AV-318, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO CAMERA
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Revision: 2009 November AV-324 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


• Camera image signal circuit.
Camera image is not shown.
Refer to AV-306, "Diagnosis Procedure".
(Vehicle width and possible —
• Composite image signal circuit.
route line is displayed.) B
Refer to AV-308, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“Reverse” is not turned ON on “Vehicle
Signals” screen of “Confirmation/Adjust- Reverse signal circuit malfunction.
ment”. C
Camera image does not switch.
“Reverse” is turned ON on “Vehicle Sig- AV control unit malfunction.
nals” screen of “Confirmation/Adjust- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-328, "Exploded
ment”. View". D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-325 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000005661201

BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The systems in the video mode. Press “DISC-AUX” to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Press “ OFF” to turn on the display.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.

RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION


Related to Telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interfer-
ence, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A) or
could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Revision: 2009 November AV-326 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

Symptom Cause and Counter measure A


Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
B
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. C
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A files on a CD, only
the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” D
cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the E
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A writing applications or other text editing applica-
tions.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. F
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Discs recorded in live file system format are not supported. (For Microsoft Windows Vista, check
the settings.) G
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A CD, or if it is a multisession disc,
the music starts playing. some time may be required before the music starts playing. H
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data. I
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”,
Move immediately to the next song
“.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
when playing
player will skip to the next song. J
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other K
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking L
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
M

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-327 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661202

CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-283, "Description".
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JPNIA0200ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket LH 3. AV control unit


4. Bracket RH

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661203

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-283, "Description".
1. Remove display unit. Refer to AV-329, "Exploded View".
2. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be
careful not to insert them wrongly.
• Be sure to perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” when replacing AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-328 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661204

Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T B
models).
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661205

C
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models). D
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION E
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-329 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661206

JSNIA0114ZZ

1. Door finisher
2. Front door squawker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661207

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove front door squawker from door finisher.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-330 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR WOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
FRONT DOOR WOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661208

D
JSNIA0118ZZ

E
1. Front door woofer
2. Woofer bracket
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661209

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove front door woofer from woofer bracket.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-331 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661210

JSNIA0119ZZ

1. Rear door speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661211

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear door speaker from rear door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-332 2010 G37 Sedan


TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
TWEETER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661212

D
JSNIA0117ZZ

E
1. Tweeter
2. Corner cover inner
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661213

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove front door finisher, and then remove corner cover inner. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove tweeter from corner cover inner.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-333 2010 G37 Sedan


CENTER SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
CENTER SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661214

JSNIA0120ZZ

1. Center speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661215

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper grille, and then remove center speaker. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View"
(A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-334 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR WOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
REAR WOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661216

D
JSNIA0121ZZ

E
1. Rear woofer

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661217


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove rear woofer from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. H

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-335 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BOSE AMP.
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661218

JSNIA0122ZZ

1. BOSE amp.
: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661219

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove BOSE amp. from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-336 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ANTENNA AMP.
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661220

D
JSNIA0123ZZ

E
1. AM-FM main connector
2. Antenna amp.
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661221

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove rear pillar finisher LH. Refer to INT-15, "Exploded View".
2. Remove antenna amp. from rear pillar LH.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-337 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621398

JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621399

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View".
3. Remove screws (A) from inside the cabin, and remove TEL
adapter unit and TEL antenna as a single unit from trunk room
side.
4. Remove bracket screws and remove TEL adapter unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-338 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661222

D
JSNIA0124ZZ

E
1. Satellite radio antenna
: Vehicle front
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661223

REMOVAL G
1. Remove head lining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT-
24, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" (normal roof models) or INT-27, "SUNROOF : Exploded View"
(sunroof models).
H
2. Remove nut, and then remove satellite radio antenna from roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. I

Satellite radio antenna mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION: J
Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof
panel may be deformed, when satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.
K

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-339 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661224

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0126ZZ

1. Center ventilator grille


2. Multifunction switch

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661225

REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove multi function switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multi function switch from center ventilator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-340 2010 G37 Sedan


PRESET SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PRESET SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661226

REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY C

JPNIA0201ZZ H

1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch


I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661227

REMOVAL
J
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove preset switch screws (A), (B), and (C), and then K
remove preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.

1. Clock
L

JSNIA0127ZZ
AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: O
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-341 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661228

Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661229

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-342 2010 G37 Sedan


USB CONNECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
USB CONNECTOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661230

D
JPNIA1789ZZ

E
1. USB connector

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661231


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-38, "M/T G
MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Push the pawl from the back of center console to remove USB connector.
INSTALLATION H
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-343 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661232

REMOVAL
Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0132ZZ

1. Microphone

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661233

REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View".
2. Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-344 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
TEL ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621416

G
JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)
H

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621417

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View". J
3. Remove screws and clip (A) from inside the cabin and remove
TEL antenna (1) connector from trunk room side.
K

M
JSNIA0159ZZ

INSTALLATION AV
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-345 2010 G37 Sedan


TEL ADAPTER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621418

JSNIA0156ZZ

1. TEL antenna 2. Satellite radio tuner 3. Bracket (front)


4. TEL adapter unit 5. Bracket (rear)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621419

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View".
3. Remove screws (A) from inside the cabin, and remove TEL
adapter unit and TEL antenna as a single unit from trunk room
side.
4. Remove bracket screws and remove TEL adapter unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.

JSNIA0157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-346 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661234

REMOVAL B
Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C

JSNIA0134ZZ
F
1. Rear view camera

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661235 G

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher outer. Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove rear view camera from trunk lid finisher outer.
INSTALLATION
I
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005681963

J
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle, K
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust Guide Lines” mode of “Confirmation/Adjust-
ment” mode. L

AV

SKIB3691E

Revision: 2009 November AV-347 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle.

Selected pattern :7
4. Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is
aligned with the guiding line. Press “OK” switch and record the
adjusted guiding line position to the AV control unit.
JSNIA2231ZZ
Up/Down adjustment range : 20° to 20°
Left/Right adjustment range : 20° to 20°
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.

Revision: 2009 November AV-348 2010 G37 Sedan


SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005661237

D
JPNIA1793ZZ

E
1. Sonar control unit

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005661238


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument finisher A. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, G
"M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove sonar control unit screw, then disconnect sonar control unit connector and remove the sonar
control unit.
H
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
I

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-349 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005688674

REMOVAL
Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0135ZZ

1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005688675

REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUST-
MENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
• Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRAL
POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".

Revision: 2009 November AV-350 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000005621420

AV

P
JSNIA2879GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-351 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005719736

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000005621569

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000005621570

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: 2009 November AV-352 2010 G37 Sedan


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-353 2010 G37 Sedan


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000005621571

Tool Description

Power tool Loosening screws

PBIC0191E

Revision: 2009 November AV-354 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005653827
B

AV
JSNIA2598ZZ

1. Center speaker 2. Tweeter LH 3. Front door squawker LH


O
4. Front door woofer LH 5. Rear door speaker LH 6. Antenna amp.
7. BOSE amp. 8. Rear woofer 9. Rear view camera
10. Rear door speaker RH 11. Satellite radio antenna 12. Front door woofer RH
P
13. Front door squawker RH 14. Tweeter RH 15. Microphone
16. GPS antenna 17. Sonar control unit 18. Steering switch
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Preset switch 21. USB connector
22. AV control unit 23. Multifunction switch 24. Display unit
A. Within rear pillar finisher LH B. Lower part of rear parcel shelf C. Instrument panel rear side

Revision: 2009 November AV-355 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Instrument driver lower panel re-
D. E. Spiral cable removed condition
moved condition
: Vehicle front

Component Description INFOID:0000000005653828

Part name Description


• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be stored.
• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication sig-
nals from the AV control unit.
• The AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, naviga-
tion, USB connection, DVD play, satellite radio and vehicle information functions.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV control unit • It is connected to the steering angle sensor and receives the steering angle sensor
signal via CAN communication.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming control.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and park-
ing brake).
• The RGB digital image signal and composite image signal are output to display
unit.
• Amp. ON signal, sound signal and mode change signal transmitted to BOSE amp.
• Update of map data is performed with the DVD-ROM.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• RGB digital image signal is input from AV control unit.
• Composite image signal is input from AV control unit.
Display unit
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display di-
rectly.
• Inputs sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to each speak-
BOSE amp. er.
• Input mode change signal from AV control unit.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Front door woofer
• Outputs low range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Front door squawker
• Outputs mid range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Rear door speaker
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Tweeter
• Outputs high range sound.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Center speaker
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
Rear woofer • Outputs low-pitched sound.
• Power (woofer amp. ON signal) is supplied from BOSE amp.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio, auxiliary in-
put and navigation, etc. operations are integrated.
Multifunction switch
• Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to AV
control unit via AV communication.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air con-
ditioner, etc. operations are integrated.
Preset switch • Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted
to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Camera power supply is input from AV control unit.
Rear view camera
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to display unit.
It is connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle sensor signal
Steering angle sensor
via CAN communication.

Revision: 2009 November AV-356 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Part name Description
A
• Controlled by AV communication transmitted from AV control unit.
Sonar control unit
• Trouble diagnosis is supported with CONSULT-III (K-LINE).
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone, voice control and navigation, etc. are pos-
Steering switch sible. B
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition.
Microphone • Microphone signal is transmitted to AV control unit. C
• Power (Microphone VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
GPS antenna GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control D
Antenna amp. unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
Satellite radio antenna Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit. E
USB connector *1
Image signal and sound signal of USB input is transmitted to AV control unit.

*1: Image signals cannot be received from iPod®.


F

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-357 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005653829

JSNIA2601GB

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005653830

Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

FUNCTION NAME
Navigation system function
Audio function
DVD play function
Hands-free phone function
USB connection function
Voice recognition function
Touch panel function
Rear view monitor function
Sonar system
Vehicle information function

COMMUNICATION SIGNAL

Revision: 2009 November AV-358 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV A
communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, unified meter
B
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information.
• AV control unit is connected with display and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of
display and display control and receives the response signal from display.
C
NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Description
• The AV control unit controls navigation function while GPS tuner has built-in map data, GYRO (angle speed D
sensor), on the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
• The AV control unit inputs operation signal with communication signal, through display (touch panel) and
multifunction switch and steering switch.
• Guide sound is output to front speaker through BOSE amp. from AV control unit when operating navigation E
system.
• A vehicle position is calculated with the GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, signal from GPS satel-
lite and map data stored on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), and transmits the map image signal (RGB image, RGB F
area, RGB image synchronizing) to the display.
Position Detection Principle
The navigation system periodically calculates the current vehicle G
position according to the following three types of signals.
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed
sensor H
• Vehicle turning angle determined by the gyroscope (angular speed
sensor)
• The travel direction of the vehicle determined by the GPS antenna
(GPS information) I
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data, which is stored in the HDD
(Hard Disk Drive) (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with J
JSNIA0177GB
a current location mark. More accurate data is used by comparing
position detection results from GPS to the map-matching.
The current position is calculated by detecting the travel distance
from the previous calculation point, and its direction change. K
• Travel distance
The travel distance is generated from the vehicle speed sensor
input signal. The automatic distance correction function is adopted L
for preventing a miss-detection of the travel distance because of
tire wear etc.
• Travel direction
The gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and GPS antenna (GPS M
information) generate the change of the travel direction. Both have
advantages and disadvantages as per the following descriptions.
SEL684V
AV

Type Advantage Disadvantage


O
Gyroscope (angular velocity Errors are accumulated when driving a long dis-
The turning angle is precisely detected.
sensor) tance without stopping.
GPS antenna (GPS informa- The travel direction (North/South/East/West) is The travel direction is not precisely detected when
tion) detected. driving slowly. P
Input signals are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with
more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
Map-matching

Revision: 2009 November AV-359 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Map-matching repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new
location is judged to be more accurate. This is done by comparing
the current vehicle position (calculated by the normal position detec-
tion method) from the map data stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).

SEL685V

There is a possibility that the vehicle position may not be corrected in the following case, and when vehicle is
driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. Correct manually the cur-
rent location mark on the screen.
• In map-matching, several alternative routes are prepared and pri-
oritized in addition to the road judged as currently driving on.
Therefore, due to errors in the distance and/or direction, an incor-
rect road may be prioritized, and the current location mark may be
repositioned to the incorrect road.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road, etc.

SEL686V

• Map-matching does not function correctly when road on which the


vehicle is driving is new, etc. and not recorded in the map data.
Also, map-matching does not function correctly when road pattern
stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due
to repair, etc.
Therefore, the map-matching function judges other road as a cur-
rently driving road if the road is not in the map, and displays the
current location mark on it. Later, the current location mark may be
repositioned to the road if the correct road is detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data is
JSNIA0180GB
limited. Therefore, correction by map-matching is not possible
when there is an excessive gap between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
vehicle.

Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:


• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.

Revision: 2009 November AV-360 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio A
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
B
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
C
AUDIO FUNCTION
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated with multifunction switch,
preset switch, touch panel, steering switch or audio recognition. Operation status of audio is indicated at dis-
play. D

FUNCTION
E
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD F

Bluetooth audio
Music Box (Hard Disk Drive)
G
Driver's Audio Stage

Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, steering switch, touch H
panel function or voice recognition function.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
I
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
Screen Display J
Switching of display is performed with serial communication between display unit and AV control unit.
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. K
• Audio signal is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp, and finally it is input to AV
control unit. Audio signal is input to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to each speaker.
Satellite Radio Mode L
• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna, and it is input to AV control unit. AV control unit
outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to both woofer and each
M
speaker.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit. AV
• AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to each speaker when CD is
inserted to AV control unit.
Bluetooth™ Audio Mode O
• Bluetooth™ audio function is built into AV control unit.
• Bluetooth™ audio can play music data in the portable audio by means of Bluetooth™ communications
between the portable audio and the AV control unit. P
• AV control unit outputs audio signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to each speaker.
Music Box Mode
• Music CD data is stored on HDD that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played.
• AV control unit outputs music (sound signal) that is stored on HDD to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs
to each speaker.
Driver's Audio Stage

Revision: 2009 November AV-361 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to
be the center of sounds.
• ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using mode
change signal.
DVD PLAY FUNCTION
• DVD is played by inserting DVD into the AV control unit.
• DVD image signals are transmitted to the display unit and DVD sound signals are transmitted to each
speaker via BOSE amp.
HANDS-FREE PHONE FUNCTION
• AV control unit includes hands-free phone function.
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth™ communication with cellular
phone.
• Operation is performed by steering switch, and operating condition is indicated on display.
• Guide sound that is heard during operation is input from AV control unit to BOSE amp., and is output from
front speaker.
When A Call Is Originated
Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to AV control unit. AV control unit
outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal. Voice sound is then heard at
the other party.
When Receiving A Call
Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party. TEL voice signal is output to door speaker, and
the signal is input to BOSE amp. via AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from cellular
phone.
USB CONNECTION FUNCTION
• Connecting iPod® or USB memory allows the driver to play iPod® music files or USB memory-stored music
files, video data, and image viewer data.
• Sound signals of music files stored in iPod® or USB memory are transmitted from the USB connector to the
AV control unit. The AV control unit transmits the sound signals to the each speaker via BOSE amp.
• Video signals and image viewer file signals are transmitted from the USB connector to the AV control unit.
The data and files are displayed on the display unit screen.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB connector.
• Only files that meet the following conditions will be played.

Music file Video file Image viewer file


File format “MP3”, “WMA”, “AAC”, “M4A” “DivX”, “MPEG4 (ASF)” “JPEG”
File extension “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac”, “.m4a” “.divx”, “.afs”, “.avi” “.jpg”, “.jpeg”
Maximum file size 2 GB 2 GB 2 MB
NOTE:
• iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Image signals cannot be received from iPod®.
• Use the enclosed USB harness when connecting iPod® to USB connector.
VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION
• Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by inputting sound to microphone.
• Start of sound recognition system can be performed by steering switch.
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM
Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching a display.
REAR VIEW MONITOR FUNCTION
• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the display unit when power is supplied from the AV con-
trol unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-362 2010 G37 Sedan


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• The AV control unit transmits a warning message, fixed guide lines, and predictive course lines to the display
unit by RGB digital image signal. Rear view monitor images are displayed by combining the RGB digital A
image signal and the camera image signals from the rear view camera.
• Predictive course lines are controlled by a steering angle sensor signal received the AV control unit via CAN
communication.
B
SONAR SYSTEM
For further information about the sonar system, refer to SN-7, "System Description".
VEHICLE INFORMATION FUNCTION C
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, maintenance and navigation are displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication
from ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. D
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings
function.
MULTI AV SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005741920 E

When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, AV control unit displays the mes-
sage and limits the AV control unit function. F
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
When the ambiance temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher
Display G
The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below:

Fail-safe mode Display (display of the fail-safe condition) H


HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature. I
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.

DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS J

Function When Fail-safe Function is activated


Operation Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated. K
Air conditioner • LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates.
Display
• Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode.
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible. L
Audio
Display No display (“Fail-safe mode” is displayed)
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera M
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Cannot be operated.
Navigation Operation Cannot be operated. AV
Self diagnosis The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition
CONSULT-III diagnosis Cannot be operated.
O
Ability Operation Mode
There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature.
If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be
operated. P
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE
Fail-safe is released on following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When The Temperature of HDD Is Low or High
If the ambient temperature becomes out of fail-safe condition range, normal mode is restored.

Revision: 2009 November AV-363 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005653831

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000005653832

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION


The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 8-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch cannot be checked.

JSNIA2585ZZ

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode


Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit, connections between system compo-
nents as well as connections between AV control unit and GPS antenna. Then it displays the diagnosis
results on the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
control unit and GPS antenna.

Revision: 2009 November AV-364 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale dis-
play and touch panel calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, B
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition, reverse, side view switch and room lamp.
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve- C
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Navigation Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted. D
XM SAT Subscrip-
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
tion Status
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past E
Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Synchronizer FES Clock – F
Confirmation/ Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Adjustment
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
G
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Hands-free Phone H
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed. I
XM NaviTrffic Change Channel
• Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
XM NavWeather
the satellite radio system can be set. J
XM
XM CGS Change Application ID
• Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the
Diag satellite radio system can be set.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history. K
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
Version Information Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.
L
METHOD OF STARTING
1. Start the engine.
M
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) AV
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “BACK” button.
O

JSNIA2586ZZ

Revision: 2009 November AV-365 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.

JSNIA2173ZZ

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.

2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-


pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction Note Red Green

NOTE:
Control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because
of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV
control unit internal error. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the
screen switch colors are determined according to the following
order of priority: red > gray.

JSNIA2609ZZ

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a


component in the diagnosis result screen.

JPNIA1787ZZ

Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode


• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.

Revision: 2009 November AV-366 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts. A
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to B


Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal- C
Control Unit
power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit.

D
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow.

Possible malfunction location / Action to


Area with yellow connection lines Description E
take
Malfunction is detected in serial communi-
Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and display unit. F
display unit.
GPS antenna connection malfunctions de-
Control unit ⇔ GPS Antenna GPS antenna
tected.
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc- G
Control unit ⇔ SAT Antenna Satellite radio antenna disconnection
tion is detected.
When either one of the following items are
detected: H
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
ground circuits.
Control unit ⇔ Sonar ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit. I
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.

CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE J
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode” K
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “Back” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment
Mode screen.
L

JSNIA2175ZZ AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-367 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Display Diagnosis

JSNIA2176GB

Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

JSNIA2177ZZ

Revision: 2009 November AV-368 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks A


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. B
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON C
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position D
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. E
Shift the selector lever other than
OFF
“R” position
SIDE VIEW SW — — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
F
ROOM LAMP OFF — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

Climate Control
Refer to “HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM” for details. G
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is H
adjusted.

JSNIA2179ZZ K

SPEED CALIBRATION
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire L
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis-
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted M
on tires.

AV

JSNIA2180ZZ O

XM SAT SUBSCRIPTION STATUS


The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked. P
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.

Revision: 2009 November AV-369 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in the AV control unit, the correct date and time
of occurrence may not be able to be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur-
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend-
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.

Display type of occur-


Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above

JPNIA1788GB

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Function".

Revision: 2009 November AV-370 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) B
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
Connection Of Gyro Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
C
Connection of G Sensor tion occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
CAN Controller Memory Error
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
Bluetooth Module Connection Error D
Sub CPU Connection Error
iPod authentification chip error
E
Audio connection error
DSP Connection Error • If a disc can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a temporary
malfunction. F
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
DSP Communication Error • Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
G
HDD Connection Error
• If the music box function has no malfunc-
HDD Read Error tions, then there is a possibility of the de-
tection of a temporary malfunction. H
HDD Write Error AV control unit malfunction is detected.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
HDD Communication Error function occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
HDD Access Error
I
GPS Communication Error An intermittent error caused by strong radio
interference may be detected unless any
GPS ROM Error
symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) oc-
GPS RAM Error GPS malfunction is detected. curs. J
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
GPS RTC Error tion occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
K
The writing of configuration data is incom- Write configuration data with CONSULT-III.
Unfinished configuration
plete. Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Function".
Check that the connection to the USB con-
USB Controller Communication Error USB connection malfunction is detected. L
nector is normal.
• If DVD can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a temporary
malfunction. M
DVD Mechanism Communication Error AV control unit malfunction is detected.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
AV
Predictive course line center position ad- Adjust the predictive course line center po-
Steer. Angle Sensor Calibration justment of the steering angle sensor is in- sition of the steering angle sensor.
complete. Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Function".
O
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground cir-
circuits.
Front Display Connection Error cuits are malfunctioning. P
• Communication circuits between AV con-
• communication circuits between AV con-
trol unit and display unit.
trol unit and display unit are malfunction-
ing.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- Check the connection of the GPS antenna
GPS Antenna Error
tected. connector.
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc-
XM Antenna Connection Error Satellite radio antenna disconnection.
tion is detected.

Revision: 2009 November AV-371 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Check USB harness between the AV con-
USB electric current Error Detection of overcurrent in USB connector.
trol unit and USB connector.
AM/FM antenna amplifier short to ground Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit mal- Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit be-
AM/FM antenna amplifier open function is detected. tween AV control unit and antenna amp.

Ext_Amp_ON output terminal short to


ground BOSE amp. ON signal circuit malfunction is BOSE amp. ON signal circuit between AV
detected. control unit and BOSE amp.
Ext_Amp_ON output terminal :open
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Sonar Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit.
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT AV communication circuits between AV
AV communication circuits between AV
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are
control unit and multifunction switch.
• Sonar Connection Error malfunctioning.

Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press
“Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press “Stop” to
stop the test tones.

JPNIA1828ZZ

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis


• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA2181ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(STRG) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.

Revision: 2009 November AV-372 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas- A
ter unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
B
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
C
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 JSNIA2612ZZ D
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Sonar–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
E
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN
Hands-Free Phone F
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment and microphone
and speaker test functions are also available.
G

I
JSNIA2183ZZ

Camera Cont.
The four functions of “Correct Draw Line of Rear view Camera”, J
“Alter/Confirm Configuration”, “Reset Configuration” and “Camera
Syst Type” are available.
K

M
JSNIA2184ZZ

Correct Draw Line of Rear view Camera


• Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear AV
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor
camera.
O

JSNIA2185ZZ

Alter/Confirm Configuration

Revision: 2009 November AV-373 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked and
modified.

JSNIA2186ZZ

Configuration list

Setting item Setting Setting item Setting


Predi. Course Lines With Wheelbase 2.8499999
Rear Coeff. K -38009.06 Total Length 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. F 0.0014620 13.715999*1
Rear Coeff. P1 0.0000062 Steering Gear Ratio 14.939999*2
Rear Coeff. P2 0.0000056 16.884000*3
Rear Coeff. C1 823.00000 Side Coeff. K 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. C2 480.00000 Side Coeff. F 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. D1 800.00000 Side Coeff. P1 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. D2 494.00000 Side Coeff. P2 0.0000000
Car Width 1.7729000 Side Coeff. C1 0.0000000
Rear Offset 0.0000000 Side Coeff. C2 0.0000000
Rear Height 1.0200800 Side Coeff. D1 0.0000000
Rear L/R Angle 0.0000000 Side Coeff. D2 0.0000000
Rear Up/Dn Angle 46.330001 Side Offset 0.0000000
Rear Roll Angle 0.0000000 Overall Height 0.0000000
Bumper Rear Dist. 0.1384900 Side L/R Angle 0.0000000
Bumper Rear Ax Dist 1.0918000 Side Up/Dn Angle 0.0000000

457.84008*1 Side Roll Angle 0.0000000

Steer. Max Angle 498.69720*2 Side Front End Dist 0.0000000

563.58789*3 Total Width 0.0000000


Min. Turning Red. 5.5000000 — —
- *1: SPORT premium grade with 4WAS
- *2: SPORT premium grade 2WD models without 4WAS
- *3: Except for above.
Reset Configuration
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be initialized.

JSNIA2187ZZ

Revision: 2009 November AV-374 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Camera Syst Type A


• Type of camera system is selectable.

D
JSNIA2188ZZ

XM
• Change Channel E
- Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
the satellite radio system can be set.
• Change Application ID
- Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the F
satellite radio system can be set.

JSNIA2484ZZ H
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been I
removed.)

JSNIA2189ZZ

L
Initialize Settings
“User Data Initialization” and “Accessory Number Initialization” are
possible.
CAUTION: M
• Never perform Accessory Number Initialization except when
configuration is unsuccessful.
• Accessory Number Initialization requires configuration. For AV
details, refer to AV-412, "Description".

O
JSNIA2190ZZ

Version Information P

Revision: 2009 November AV-375 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.

JSNIA2191ZZ

CONSULT - III Function INFOID:0000000005653833

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.

Diagnosis mode Description


Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
Work Support Steering angle sensor can be adjusted.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.

AV communication
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.

Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


CAN communication malfunction is detect-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-414, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ed.

Revision: 2009 November AV-376 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] B
malfunction is detected.
Cont Unit [U1200]
GYRO NO CONN [U1201] Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
C
G-SENSOR NO CONN [U1202] tion occurs constantly. Refer to AV-474,
"Exploded View".
CAN CONT [U1216]
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
BLUETOOTH MODULE [U1217] D
SUB CPU CONN [U1228]
iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229]
E
Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E]
HDD CONN [U1218] • If the music box function has no mal-
functions, then there is a possibility of
HDD READ [U1219] F
the detection of a temporary malfunc-
HDD WRITE [U121A] AV control unit malfunction is detected. tion.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
HDD COMM [U121B]
function occurs constantly.
G
HDD ACCESS [U121C] Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
GPS COMM [U1204] An intermittent error caused by strong ra-
dio interference may be detected unless
GPS ROM [U1205] H
any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.)
GPS RAM [U1206] GPS malfunction is detected. occurs.
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
GPS RTC [U1207] tion occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
I

Check that the connection to the USB con-


USB CONTROLLER [U1225] USB connection malfunction is detected.
nector is normal.
J
DSP CONN [U121D] • If a disc can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a tempo-
rary malfunction.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
DSP COMM [U121E] • Replace the AV control unit if the mal- K
function occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
• If DVD can be played, then there is a L
possibility of the detection of a tempo-
rary malfunction.
DVD COMM [U1227] AV control unit malfunction is detected.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly. M
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
The writing of configuration data is incom- Write configuration data with CONSULT-
CONFIG UNFINISH [U122A]
plete. III. Refer to AV-412, "Description".
AV
Adjust the predictive course line center po-
Predictive course line center position ad- sition of the steering angle sensor.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [U1232] justment of the steering angle sensor is in- Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUA-
complete. TOR NEUTRAL POSITION ADJUST- O
MENT : Description".
When either one of the following items are
detected: P
• Display unit power supply and ground
• display unit power supply and ground
circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] circuits are malfunctioning.
• Communication circuits between AV
• communication circuits between AV
control unit and display unit.
control unit and display unit are malfunc-
tioning.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is Check the connection of the GPS antenna
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244]
detected. connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-377 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Satellite radio antenna connection mal-
XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] Satellite radio antenna disconnection.
function is detected.
Detection of overcurrent in USB connect- Check USB harness between the AV con-
USB OVERCURRENT [U1263]
er. trol unit and USB connector.
ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL
Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit mal- Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit be-
[OPEN or SHORT]
function is detected. tween AV control unit and antenna amp.
[U1264]
AMP ON TERMINAL
BOSE amp. ON signal circuit malfunction BOSE amp. ON signal circuit between AV
[GND-SHORT or VB-SHORT]
is detected. control unit and BOSE amp.
[U1265]
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Sonar control unit power supply and
• sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• SONAR CONN [U125C] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and sonar control unit.
control unit and sonar control unit are
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] AV communication circuits between AV
AV communication circuits between AV
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] control unit and multifunction switch are
control unit and multifunction switch.
• SONAR CONN [U125C] malfunctioning.

DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks


On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than R
SIDE VIEW SW Off — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ROOM LAMP Off — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

SELECTION FROM MENU

Revision: 2009 November AV-378 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals. A

Item to be selected Description


VHCL SPD SIG B
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” C
IGN SIG
is selected.
REV SIG
SIDE VIEW SW D
ROOM LAMP

WORK SUPPORT E
Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
F
unit side.

Item Description
G
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.

CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows. H

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit. I
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-379 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005857690

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On


VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off

Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On


PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off

Ignition switch Light switch ON On


ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC

Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On


REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off
Ignition switch
SIDE VIEW SW* ON
— Off

Ignition switch
ROOM LAMP* ON
— Off

*: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.


TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA2862ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Revision: 2009 November AV-380 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(GR)
ON
C

Ignition D
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(O) (W)
ON

E
SKIB3609E

F
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output
(V) (LG)
ON
G

SKIB3609E

Keep pressing SOURCE H


0V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU UP
1.0 V
switch.
I
Ignition Keep pressing MENU
6 15 2.0 V
Steering switch signal A Input switch DOWN switch.
(P) (B)
ON
Keep pressing switch 3.0 V J
Keep pressing ENTER
4.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 5.0 V K
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
ACC L
10 — Shield — — — —

M
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(R) (G)
ON AV

SKIB3609E

Ignition
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output
P
(BR) (Y)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-381 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
switch.
Keep pressing VOL UP
Ignition 1.0 V
16 15 switch.
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(L) (B) 2.0 V
ON Keep pressing switch.

Keep pressing switch. 3.0 V

Except for above. 5.0 V


Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Ignition At rear view camera image


22 6.0 V
Ground Camera power supply Output switch is displayed.
(R)
ON Except for above. 0V
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
29
Ground Disk eject signal Input switch
(V) Except for above. 5.0 V
ON
Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V
30
Ground Mode change signal Output switch
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V
ON
Ignition
42
Ground Camera ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition
49
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Parking brake is ON. 0V

Ignition
65
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(SB) Parking brake is OFF.
ON

JSNIA0007GB

Ignition
67 Composite image signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(P) ground
ON

Ignition
68
Ground Composite image signal Output switch At DVD image is displayed.
(L)
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
72
Ground Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(G)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-382 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
73 Communication signal When adjusting display C
Ground Output switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J D
74 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
75 AV communication signal Input/
E
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
76 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output F
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V
79
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
OFF G
Ignition
80
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
H
Ignition R position 12.0 V
81
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(BG) Other than R position 0V
ON
I
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit). J
Ignition
82 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
K

JSNIA0012GB L
83 — Shield — — — —

M
Ignition
87
71 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(R)
ON AV

PKIB5037J

88
O
— Shield — — — —
(B)

Ignition
89 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

Revision: 2009 November AV-383 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
90 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
91 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
92 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
129
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
130
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R)
131
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W)
132
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
133 — Shield — — — —
150 — FM sub Input — — —
151 — AM-FM main Input — — —
Ignition
152 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Input switch — 12.0 V
ON
Ignition
Not connected GPS anten-
153 Ground GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
na connector.
ON
154 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
RGB digital image signal
157 Ground Output switch Not connected connector. 1.3 V
(−)
ON
Ignition
RGB digital image signal
158 Ground Output switch Not connected connector. 1.3 V
(+)
ON
Ignition
Not connected satellite an-
159 Ground Satellite antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
tenna connector.
ON
160 — Shield — — — —

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005653910

When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, AV control unit displays the mes-
sage and limits the AV control unit function.
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
When the ambiance temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher
Display
The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below:

Fail-safe mode Display (display of the fail-safe condition)


HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature.
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.

DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS

Revision: 2009 November AV-384 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Function When Fail-safe Function is activated A


Operation Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated.
Air conditioner • LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates.
Display
• Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode. B
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible.
Audio
Display No display (“Fail-safe mode” is displayed)
C
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Cannot be operated. D
Navigation Operation Cannot be operated.
Self diagnosis The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition
E
CONSULT-III diagnosis Cannot be operated.

Ability Operation Mode


There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature. F
If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be
operated.
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE G
Fail-safe is released on following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When The Temperature of HDD Is Low or High
If the ambient temperature becomes out of fail-safe condition range, normal mode is restored. H
DTC Index INFOID:0000000005653911

I
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

DTC Display item Refer to


J
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-414, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-415, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Cont Unit [U1200] AV-416, "DTC Logic" K
U1201 GYRO NO CONN [U1201] AV-417, "DTC Logic"
U1202 G-SENSOR NO CONN [U1202] AV-418, "DTC Logic"
L
U1204 GPS COMM [U1204] AV-419, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1205 GPS ROM [U1205] AV-420, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1206 GPS RAM [U1206] AV-421, "Diagnosis Procedure" M
U1207 GPS RTC [U1207] AV-422, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-423, "DTC Logic"
U1217 BLUETOOTH MODULE [U1217] AV-424, "DTC Logic" AV
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-425, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-426, "Diagnosis Procedure"
O
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-427, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U121B HDD COMM [U121B] AV-428, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-429, "Diagnosis Procedure" P
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-430, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U121E DSP COMM [U121E] AV-431, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1225 USB CONTROLLER [U1225] AV-432, "DTC Logic"
U1227 DVD COMM [U1227] AV-433, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV-434, "DTC Logic"

Revision: 2009 November AV-385 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC Display item Refer to
U1229 iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229] AV-435, "DTC Logic"
U122A CONFIG UNFINISH [U122A] AV-436, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U122E Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E] AV-437, "DTC Logic"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-438, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-439, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] AV-441, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] AV-442, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1263 USB OVERCURRENT [U1263] AV-443, "Diagnosis Procedure"
ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL
U1264 AV-444, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[OPEN or SHORT] [U1264]
AMP ON TERMINAL
U1265 AV-445, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[GND-SHORT or VB-SHORT] [U1265]
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-447, "DTC Logic"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-446, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-446, "Description"
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240] AV-446, "Description"
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]

Revision: 2009 November AV-386 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005857691

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

JSNIA2241ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES F

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition G
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
6 — Shield — — — — H
7
— Shield — — — —
(B)
I

Ignition
8 At rear view camera image
(G)
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
is displayed.
J
ON

SKIB2251J K

Ignition
L
9 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(L) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
M
PKIB5039J

AV
Ignition
10 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(LG) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON O

PKIB5039J

P
Ignition
11
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
12
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-387 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
18
Ground Composite image signal Input switch At DVD image is displayed.
(L)
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
19
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(P)
ON
22
— Shield — — — —
(B)
Ignition
23
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(LG)
ACC
RGB digital image signal
27 — Input — — —
(−)
RGB digital image signal
28 — Input — — —
(+)

Revision: 2009 November AV-388 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
BOSE AMP.
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000005857692

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

JSNIA0760ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output G

H
Ignition
1 2
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(L) (W)
ON
I
SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 3
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(V) (LG) K
ON

SKIB3609E
L

Ignition M
5 6 Sound signal door woofer
Output switch Sound output
(G) (R) RH
ON

AV
SKIB3609E

Ignition
7
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B) O
ON
Ignition
10
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF P
Ignition
11
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: 2009 November AV-389 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
14 9 Sound signal front door
Output switch Sound output
(B) (W) woofer LH
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
16 17
Sound signal woofer Output switch Sound output
(SB) (V)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
18 19 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Sound output
(L) (P) speaker LH
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
20
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — 10.0 V
(W)
ACC
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
22
Ground Woofer Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(GR)
ACC

Ignition
24 23
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Sound output
(V) (SB)
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
26 25
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Sound output
(BR) (Y)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: 2009 November AV-390 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak- C
Output switch Sound output
(L) (BG) er
ON

SKIB3609E D

E
Ignition
31 32 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Sound output
(LG) (Y) speaker RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E

Ignition
33 34
Sound signal front RH Input switch Sound output
(R) (G)
ON
H

SKIB3609E
I

Ignition J
35 36
Sound signal front LH Input switch Sound output
(P) (L)
ON

K
SKIB3609E

Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V


37
Ground Mode change signal Input switch
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V L
ON

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-391 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

WIRING DIAGRAM
BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005653933

NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.

JCNWM3749GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-392 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3750GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-393 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3751GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-394 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3752GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-395 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3753GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-396 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3754GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-397 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3755GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-398 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3756GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-399 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3757GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-400 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3758GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-401 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3759GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-402 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3760GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-403 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3761GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-404 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3762GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-405 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3763GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-406 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

AV

JCNWM3764GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-407 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

JCNWM3765GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-408 2010 G37 Sedan


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000005654076
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Function".


• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-385, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-464, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
Revision: 2009 November AV-409 2010 G37 Sedan
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III
Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-385, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-464, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self-Diagnosis Results”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2009 November AV-410 2010 G37 Sedan


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
Description INFOID:0000000005654078

BEFORE REPLACEMENT B
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT-III configuration
before replacement.
AFTER REPLACEMENT C
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT-III.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order. D
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005654079 E

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


F
-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-412, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE: G
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". I

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION J

-CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-412, "Work Procedure". K

>> GO TO 4.
L
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal. M

>> WORK END


AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-411 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000005654080

• Since vehicle specifications are not included in the AV control unit after replacement, it is required to write
vehicle specifications with CONSULT-III.
• Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

Work Procedure INFOID:0000000005654081

NOTE:
If “WRITE CONFIGURATION” is unsuccessful, perform “Accessory Number Initialization”. For details, refer to
AV-364, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
After performing “Accessory Number Initialization”, reboot the AV control unit to perform “WRITE CONFIGU-
RATION”.
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of “MULTI AV”.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-CONFIG FILE”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file”.

>> WORK END


3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-MANUAL SELECTION”
CONSULT-III Configuration
Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit.
For data to write, refer to AV-412, "Configuration List".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal.

>> WORK END


Configuration List INFOID:0000000005654082

CAUTION:
Check vehicle specifications before servicing.

Revision: 2009 November AV-412 2010 G37 Sedan


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

MANUAL SETTING ITEM A


NOTE
Items Setting value
LHD —
STEERING B
RHD —
SPORT premium grade
MODE 1
with 4WAS
C
SPORT premium grade
GRADE
MODE 3 2WD models without
4WAS
D
MODE 2 Except for above
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH — E
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
F

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-413 2010 G37 Sedan


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005654345

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-28, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654346

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000]
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654347

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-19, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-38, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2009 November AV-414 2010 G37 Sedan


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654348

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction factor
SULT-III C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
[U1010]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-415 2010 G37 Sedan


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654349

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
Cont Unit
U1200 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1200]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-416 2010 G37 Sedan


U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654350

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
GYRO NO CONN C
U1201 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1201]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-417 2010 G37 Sedan


U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654351

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
G-SENSOR NO CONN
U1202 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1202]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-418 2010 G37 Sedan


U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005654352

An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep- B
tion error, etc.) occur. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-474,
"Exploded View".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654353 C

Display contents of
DTC
CONSULT-III
DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor D

An intermittent error caused by strong


radio interference may be detected
unless any symptom (GPS reception E
GPS CONN
U1204 GPS malfunction is detected. error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV
[U1204]
control unit if the malfunction occurs
constantly. Refer to AV-474, "Explod-
ed View". F

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654354

G
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Delete the “Self-Diagnosis Results” of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again. H
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". I
NO >> An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-419 2010 G37 Sedan


U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000005654355

An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep-
tion error, etc.) occur. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-474,
"Exploded View".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654356

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
An intermittent error caused by strong
radio interference may be detected
unless any symptom (GPS reception
GPS ROM
U1205 GPS malfunction is detected. error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV
[U1205]
control unit if the malfunction occurs
constantly. Refer to AV-474, "Explod-
ed View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654357

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS


1. Delete the “Self-Diagnosis Results” of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
NO >> An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.

Revision: 2009 November AV-420 2010 G37 Sedan


U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005654358

An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep- B
tion error, etc.) occur. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-474,
"Exploded View".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654359 C

Display contents of
DTC
CONSULT-III
DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor D

An intermittent error caused by strong


radio interference may be detected
unless any symptom (GPS reception E
GPS RAM
U1206 GPS malfunction is detected. error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV
[U1206]
control unit if the malfunction occurs
constantly. Refer to AV-474, "Explod-
ed View". F

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654360

G
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Delete the “Self-Diagnosis Results” of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again. H
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". I
NO >> An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-421 2010 G37 Sedan


U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000005654361

An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep-
tion error, etc.) occur. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-474,
"Exploded View".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654362

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
An intermittent error caused by strong
radio interference may be detected
unless any symptom (GPS reception
GPS RTC
U1207 GPS malfunction is detected. error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV
[U1207]
control unit if the malfunction occurs
constantly. Refer to AV-474, "Explod-
ed View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654363

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS


1. Delete the “Self-Diagnosis Results” of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
NO >> An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.

Revision: 2009 November AV-422 2010 G37 Sedan


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654364

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
CAN CONT C
U1216 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1216]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-423 2010 G37 Sedan


U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654365

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
BLUETOOTH MODULE
U1217 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly.
[U1217]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-424 2010 G37 Sedan


U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654366

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If the music box function has no
C
malfunctions, then there is a possi-
bility of the detection of a temporary
HDD CONN
U1218 AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
[U1218]
• Replace the AV control unit if the D
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654367 E

1.CHECK MUSIC BOX FUNCTION


F
Is music box function normal?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-425 2010 G37 Sedan


U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654368

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If the music box function has no
malfunctions, then there is a possi-
bility of the detection of a temporary
HDD READ
U1219 AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
[U1219]
• Replace the AV control unit if the
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654369

1.CHECK MUSIC BOX FUNCTION


Is music box function normal?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-426 2010 G37 Sedan


U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654370

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If the music box function has no
C
malfunctions, then there is a possi-
bility of the detection of a temporary
HDD WRITE
U121A AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
[U121A]
• Replace the AV control unit if the D
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654371 E

1.CHECK MUSIC BOX FUNCTION


F
Is music box function normal?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-427 2010 G37 Sedan


U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654372

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If the music box function has no
malfunctions, then there is a possi-
bility of the detection of a temporary
HDD COMM
U121B AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
[U121B]
• Replace the AV control unit if the
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654373

1.CHECK MUSIC BOX FUNCTION


Is music box function normal?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-428 2010 G37 Sedan


U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654374

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If the music box function has no
C
malfunctions, then there is a possi-
bility of the detection of a temporary
HDD ACCESS
U121C AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
[U121C]
• Replace the AV control unit if the D
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654375 E

1.CHECK MUSIC BOX FUNCTION


F
Is music box function normal?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-429 2010 G37 Sedan


U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654376

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If a disc can be played, then there
is a possibility of the detection of a
DSP CONN temporary malfunction.
U121D AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121D] • Replace the AV control unit if the
malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654377

1.CHECK PLAYBACK OF A DISK (CD)


Can a disk (CD) be played?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-430 2010 G37 Sedan


U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654378

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If a disc can be played, then there
C
is a possibility of the detection of a
DSP COMM temporary malfunction.
U121E AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121E] • Replace the AV control unit if the
malfunction occurs constantly. D
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654379

E
1.CHECK PLAYBACK OF A DISK (CD)
F
Can a disk (CD) be played?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-431 2010 G37 Sedan


U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654380

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
SULT-III
USB CONTROLLER Check that the connection to the USB con-
U1225 USB connection malfunction is detected.
[U1225] nector is normal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-432 2010 G37 Sedan


U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654381

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
• If DVD can be played, then there is
C
a possibility of the detection of a
temporary malfunction.
U1227 DVD COMM [U1227] AV control unit malfunction is detected.
• Replace the AV control unit if the
malfunction occurs constantly. D
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654382

E
1.CHECK PLAYBACK OF A DISK (DVD)
F
Can a disc (DVD) be played?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected transitory.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
G

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-433 2010 G37 Sedan


U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654383

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
SULT-III
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-434 2010 G37 Sedan


U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654384

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
SULT-III C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
iPod CERTIFICATION
U1229 AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
[U1229]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-435 2010 G37 Sedan


U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654385

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CONFIG UNFINISH Write configuration data with “MULTI
U122A The writing of configuration data is incomplete.
[U122A] AV” of CONSULT-III.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654386

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS


When U122A is detected, write configuration data with “MULTI AV” of CONSULT-III.

>> Write configuration data with “MULTI AV” of CONSULT-III. Refer to AV-411, "Description".

Revision: 2009 November AV-436 2010 G37 Sedan


U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654387

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display contents of CON-


DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
SULT-III C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
Built-in AUDIO CONN
U122E AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly.
[U122E]
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
D

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-437 2010 G37 Sedan


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654388

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Adjust the predictive course line cen-
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the
U1232 ter position of the steering angle sen-
[1232] steering angle sensor is incomplete.
sor.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654389

1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.

>> Adjusts the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit)
side. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION :
Special Repair Requirement".

Revision: 2009 November AV-438 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654390

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected:
• Display unit power supply and C
• display unit power supply and ground circuit are mal-
FRONT DISP CONN ground circuit.
U1243 functioning.
[U1243] • Communication circuit between AV
• communication circuit between AV control unit and dis-
control unit and display unit.
play unit are malfunctioning. D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654391

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT E

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-448, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. H

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals I
9 89
M75 M210 Existed
10 73
J
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit K
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
9
M75 Not existed L
10
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. AV
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
O

Revision: 2009 November AV-439 2010 G37 Sedan


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M75 9 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

When adjusting display bright-


M75 10 Ground
ness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-475, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-440 2010 G37 Sedan


U1244 GPS ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654392

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
GPS ANTENNA CONN Check the connection of the GPS an-
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. C
[U1244] tenna connector.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654393

D
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK
Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder.
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
F
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. G
3. Check voltage between AV control unit and ground.

(+) H
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal
153 Ground 5.0 V I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END J
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-441 2010 G37 Sedan


U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654394

Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
XM ANTENNA CONN Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is detect-
U1258 Satellite radio antenna disconnection.
[U1258] ed.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654395

1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CHECK


Visually check satellite radio antenna (antenna base) and antenna feeder.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal
159 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-442 2010 G37 Sedan


U1263 USB
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1263 USB
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654396

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
USB OVERCURRENT Check USB harness between the AV
U1263 Detection of overcurrent in USB connector. C
[U1263] control unit and USB connector.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654397

D
1.CHECK USB HARNESS
Visually check USB harness.
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace USB harness.
F

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-443 2010 G37 Sedan


U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654398

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
ANTENNA AMP TER-
Check antenna amp. ON signal circuit
MINAL
U1264 Radio antenna amp. ON circuit is open or shorted. between the AV control unit and an-
[OPEN or SHORT]
tenna amp.
[U1264]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654399

1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA AMP.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect antenna amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and antenna amp. harness connector.

AV control unit Antenna amp


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
M371 152 M378 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M371 152 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit Voltage


(–)
Connector Terminals (Approx.)

M371 152 Ground 12.0 V


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace antenna amp. Refer to AV-483, "Exploded View" .
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-444 2010 G37 Sedan


U1265 BOSE AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1265 BOSE AMP.
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654400

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
AMP ON TERMINAL
Check BOSE amp. ON signal circuit C
[GND-SHORT or VB-
U1265 BOSE amp. ON circuit is open or shorted. between the AV control unit and
SHORT]
BOSE amp.
[U1265]
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005654401

1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND BOSE AMP. E


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and BOSE amp. harness connector.
F

AV control unit BOSE amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals G
M208 1 B41 20 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
H
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
I
M208 1 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE AV CONTROL UNIT
K
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
L
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (–)
(Approx.) M
Connector Terminals
M208 1 Ground 10.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-482, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
O

Revision: 2009 November AV-445 2010 G37 Sedan


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005654402

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta-
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items are detected: • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
and multifunction switch are malfunctioning. switch.
When either one of the following items are detected: • Sonar control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• sonar control unit power supply and ground circuits are ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U125C • SONAR CONN
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and sonar control
[U125C]
and sonar control unit are malfunctioning. unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300
• SWITCH CONN AV communication circuits between AV control unit and AV communication circuits between AV
U1240
[U1240] multifunction switch are malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
U125C
• SONAR CONN
[U125C]

Revision: 2009 November AV-446 2010 G37 Sedan


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005654403

B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT-III
Replace AV control unit. If the mal-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication C
U1310 function occurs constantly.
[U1310] circuit.
Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-447 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655067

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply M208 19 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M208 7 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground M208 20 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655068

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.


Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-448 2010 G37 Sedan


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) A
Battery power supply M75 11 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M75 23 ACC Battery voltage
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between Display unit and fuse.
C
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
E
Ground M75 12 OFF Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
BOSE AMP.
G
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655069

1.CHECK FUSE H
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No. I


Battery 5, 8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
L
Battery power supply B42 10, 11 OFF Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
AV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
O
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
Ground B42 7, 12 OFF Existed
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-449 2010 G37 Sedan


RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655070

Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB digital image signal to the display unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655071

1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
27 157
M386 M385 Existed
28 158
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
27
M386 Not existed
28
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Display unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals
27
M386 Ground — 1.3 V
28
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-475, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-450 2010 G37 Sedan


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005655072

AV control unit transmits the playback DVD image signal to the display unit. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655073

1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and display unit harness connector. D

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M210 68 M75 18 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. F

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M210 68 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL I
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J

(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal

M210 68 Ground At DVD image is displayed.


M

SKIB2251J
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-475, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". O

Revision: 2009 November AV-451 2010 G37 Sedan


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655076

The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655077

1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Multifunction switch AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M72 14 M209 29 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.

Multifunction switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M72 14 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Pressing the eject switch 0V
M209 29 Ground
Except for above 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace preset switch. Refer to AV-486, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2009 November AV-452 2010 G37 Sedan


MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000005655078

• AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp. B


• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to
be the center of sounds.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655079 C

1.CHECK CONTINUITY MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
AV control unit BOSE amp.
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M209 30 B41 37 Existed F

4. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.


G
BOSE amp.
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B41 37 Not existed H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I

2.CHECK MODE CHANGE SIGNAL


1. Connect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
Voltage
BOSE amp. (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal L
Driver's Audio Stage ON. 0V
B41 37 Ground
Driver's Audio Stage OFF. 8.5 V
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-482, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-453 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655080

Supply power from AV control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the AV control
unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655081

1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.

AV control unit Microphone


Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
71 2
M210 72 R17 4 Existed
87 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
72
M210 Not existed
87
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M210 72 M210 71 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector.

Revision: 2009 November AV-454 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

(+) (−) A
AV control unit AV control unit Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B

C
M210 87 M210 71 Give a voice.

D
PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View". E
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-489, "Exploded View".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-455 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005744651

• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the display unit when power is supplied from the AV con-
trol unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005744652

1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M209 22 B305 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M209 22 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M209 22 Ground Shift position is “R”. 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connector.

Display unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M75 8 B305 3 Existed
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2009 November AV-456 2010 G37 Sedan


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Display unit A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M75 8 Not existed
B
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. C
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check signal between display unit harness connector and ground.
E
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
F

G
At rear view camera im-
M75 8 Ground
age is displayed.
H

SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal? I


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-475, "Exploded View".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-492, "Exploded View".
J

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-457 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655084

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655085

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M208 6 M36 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M208 6 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M208 6 M208 15 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-458, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005655086

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-458 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
ENTER switch ON : 2003 – 2043 Ω
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω B
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω
C
Between terminals 15 and 17
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω JSNIA0112GB

D
switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-459 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655087

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655088

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M208 16 M36 31 Existed
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M208 16 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M208 16 M208 15 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-460, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005655089

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-460 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
ENTER switch ON : 2003 – 2043 Ω
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω B
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω
C
Between terminals 15 and 17
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω JSNIA0112GB

D
switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-461 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000005655090

Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.


Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005655091

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

AV control unit Spiral cable


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M208 15 M36 33 Existed
3. Connect AV control unit connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M208 15 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded View"
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-462, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View"
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000005655092

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector terminals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.

Revision: 2009 November AV-462 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Standard
Between terminals 14 and 17 A
ENTER switch ON : 2003 – 2043 Ω
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω
MENU DOWN switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω B
MENU UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
SOURCE switch ON :0Ω
C
Between terminals 15 and 17
switch ON : 716 – 730 Ω JSNIA0112GB

D
switch ON : 318 – 324 Ω
VOL UP switch ON : 120 – 122 Ω
VOL DOWN switch ON :0Ω E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-463 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005654339

RELATED TO NAVIGATION

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit
• All switches cannot be operated. malfunction.
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system • AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
selection screen when the CON- multifunction switch.
SULT-III is started. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-
376, "CONSULT - III Function".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-448, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operat- Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-di-
ed. agnosis function. Refer to AV-364, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-
III “self-diagnosis result” of “MULTI AV”. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-385, "DTC Index".
tion".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set-
ting operation is abnormal. There is no malfunction in the CON-
SULT-III “self-diagnosis results” of
“MULTI AV”. Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Func-
tion".
On the setting display select “system AV control unit malfunction.
Guide sound is not heard or too
sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded
low.
confirm that guide sound is ON. View".

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


Simple Check for Bluetooth™ Communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction.
1. Turn ON cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
4. When operated Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone, check
if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name.
(If other Bluetooth™ device is located near cellular phone, a
name of the device would be displayed also.)
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table. JPNIA0441GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-464 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (no connec-
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
tion is displayed on the display
B
at the guide.)
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction.
C
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded
established.
performed, however, voice between View".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
D
Check the “microphone speaker” in In-
The other party's voice cannot
spection & Adjustment Mode if sound is
be heard by hands-free phone. E
heard.

Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.


by the other party with hands- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
free phone communication. Sound operation function does not work. F
Refer to AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch's ”VOL UP”, “VOL Steering switch malfunction.
DOWN”, “ ” switch works, but “ ” it Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-487, "Exploded
does not work. View". G
The system cannot be operat-
ed. Steering switch's “ ”, ”VOL UP”, “VOL Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
DOWN”, “ ” switches do not work. Refer to AV-460, "Diagnosis Procedure".
H
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
All steering switches do not work.
Refer to AV-462, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO RGB IMAGE I

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


RGB digital image signal circuit malfunction. J
RGB image is not shown. —
Refer to AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL


K
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
AV control unit malfunction.
Voice sounds at “Voice Microphone Test”
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded
L
The voice cannot be controlled of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
View".
even if the voice control screen
is displayed. Voice does not sound at “Voice Micro-
Microphone circuit malfunction.
phone Test” of Confirmation/Adjustment M
Refer to AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure".
mode.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU Steering switch malfunction.
UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ENTER” switch Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-487, "Exploded AV
works, but “ ” it does not work. View".
The voice cannot be controlled
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
(Voice control screen is not dis- Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
played). UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ”, “ENTER” Refer to AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
switches do not work.
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
All steering switches do not work.
Refer to AV-462, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
RELATED TO AUDIO

Revision: 2009 November AV-465 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


Disk eject signal circuit malfunction.
The disk cannot be removed. —
Refer to AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits malfunc-
No sound from all speakers.
tion.
Refer to AV-449, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
Audio sound is not heard.
• Woofer power supply and ground circuit malfunction.
Sound is not heard from woofer. • Sound signal (rear woofer) circuit malfunction.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signals circuit of suspect system.
It does not change to “Driver's Mode change signal circuit malfunction.

Audio Stage” mode. Refer to AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
self-diagnosis result. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Func- Refer to AV-385, "DTC Index".
tion".

Satellite radio is not received. Perform the following inspection procedure.


There is no malfunction in the CON- 1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for
SULT-III self-diagnosis result. looseness.
Refer to AV-376, "CONSULT - III Func- NOTE:
tion". Tightening torque: 6.5 N-m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna feeder malfunction.

RELATED TO DVD MODE

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


Disk eject signal circuit malfunction.
The disk cannot be removed. —
Refer to AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-376,
"CONSULT - III Function" . When detecting no malfunc-
tion in those components, the following items are a pos-
DVD image is not displayed. —
sible cause.
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits mal-
No sound from all speakers.
function.
Refer to AV-449, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
DVD sound is not heard.
• Woofer power supply and ground circuit malfunction.
Sound is not heard from rear woofer. • Sound signal (rear woofer) circuit malfunction.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signals circuit of suspect system.

RELATED TO CAMERA
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


Camera image is not shown.
Camera image signal circuit.
(Vehicle width and predictive —
Refer to AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure".
course line are displayed.)

Revision: 2009 November AV-466 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
A
Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/
Adjustment mode, Reverse Sensor is not Reverse signal circuit malfunction.
turned ON at “Connection Confirmation”.
Camera image does not switch.
Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/ AV control unit malfunction. B
Adjustment mode, Reverse Sensor is Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-474, "Exploded
turned ON at “Connection Confirmation”. View".

RELATED TO USB C
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
D
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
® • USB harness malfunction.
iPod or USB memory can not —
be recognized. • USB connector malfunction. E

iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH F

Symptoms Probable malfunction location


Steering switch ground circuit malfunction. G
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-462, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-487, "Exploded View". H
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
DOWN”,“ ”, “ENTER”switches do not work. Refer to AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction. I


Steering switch's “ ”, “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ”
switches do not work. Refer to AV-460, "Diagnosis Procedure".

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-467 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000005654340

NOTE:
For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
The systems in the video mode. Press “DISC-AUX” to change the mode.

No image is displayed. The display is turned off. Press “ -” to turn on the display.
The interior of the vehicle becomes the a little less
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
than 80°C (176°F) or high temperature, and the pro-
cooled down.
tection of the display acts, and a display is turned off.
Screen not clear. Contrast setting is not appropriate. Adjust the contrast of the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or
The volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press “MAP”.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
information in the Address Book.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION
Related to Basic Operation

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet.
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder.
The volume if your voice is too loud. Speak softer.
Your pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.
The system does not
recognize your com- Press and release “ ” switch on the steering
You are speaking before the voice recognition is ready switch, and speak a command after the tone
mand.
or sounds.
The system recognizes Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
your command incor- 8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
after you press and release “ ” switch on the
rectly released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
steering switch.
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen.
Lower the fan speed as necessary as voice com-
The fan of the air conditioner is too loud.
mand can be recognized more easily.

Related to Item Choice


The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Revision: 2009 November AV-468 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem
is resolved. A

Symptom/ error message Solution


1. Ensure that the command format is valid. B
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level.
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC-
OGNIZED” or the system fails to in- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. C
terpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these D
in place.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
The system consistently selects by giving the “Addressbook” Directory or Phone Directory command.
the wrong voicetag E
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Related to Telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try F
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolved. G

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. H
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle. I
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE: J
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be K
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects L
can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

RELATED TO AUDIO M
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interfer-
ence, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. AV
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A) or O
could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play. P

Revision: 2009 November AV-469 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

Symptom Cause and Counter measure


Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A files on a CD, only
the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “AAC”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a”
cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A writing applications or other text editing applica-
tions.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Disks recorded in live file system format are not supported. (For Microsoft Windows Vista, check
the settings.)
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A CD, or if it is a multisession disc,
the music starts playing. some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “AAC”,
Move immediately to the next song
“.M4A” “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
when playing
player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.

RELATED TO DVD

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


Some operations may be rejected or may not function
Not working as operated as intended because of the manufacturer's intent, de- This is not a malfunction.
pending on DVD.
If a requested operation is prohibited, then a message
Operation not accepted is displayed on the screen. (Message display depends This is not a malfunction.
on DVD.)

Revision: 2009 November AV-470 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
A
Check that the DVD is inserted in the right place. Upturn the DVD (facing the title upward).
Wait until the condensation evaporates (approx-
Check that there is no condensation inside the player.
imately one hour).
B
DVD menu is displayed. Select item to touch “ENTER”.
DVD can not be played
DVDs with a different region code can not be
Insertion of a DVD with a different region code.
played. Check DVD.
C
Some DVD softwares may not be played because not
This is not a malfunction.
all DVD softwares fully comply in the standard.

Interruption during play- Errors may not be corrected depending on the


D
back or flicker in the dis- Check that the DVD has no scratches and dirt. size of scratches.
play Wipe and clean the dirt on the disc.
Subtitle setting is OFF. Set subtitle. E
Subtitles not shown
Subtitle is not included in the software. Check DVD.
If a language is not included in the DVD, then the DVD
Not played in set language Check DVD.
is played in a recommended language. F
If a set subtitle is not included in the DVD, then the
Not played with set subtitle Check DVD.
DVD is played with a recommended subtitle.
Angle unchangeable Plural angles are not recorded in the software. Check if the DVD is multi−angle capable. G
Display mode to the output aspect ratio for the DVD
Unusual screen display Switch to the appropriate display mode.
software is inappropriate.
Distortion in picture In the process of fast−forward or fast−reverse. This is not a malfunction. H
Low sound quality Check that the DVD has no scratches and dirt. Wipe and clean the dirt on the disc.
The inclusion of the number of languages de-
The DVD is not multilanguage−capable. pends on DVD. Languages may be selectable on I
Subtitle and language not
selectable (not played with the Menu screen. Check DVD.
set subtitle or in set lan- If the DVD has a priority language or settings,
guage) The DVD has a priority language or setting. then settings changed with this device are not re- J
flected.
Playback of Mix mode Truck 1. (Mix mode: Format in-
Playback time is indicated,
cluding Truck 1 with data other than music and Trucks Play music data included in trucks from Truck 2. K
but no sound comes out.
from Truck 2 with music data.)

RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON


L
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does M
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction.
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of AV
a processing procedure.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry O
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position P
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the vehi-
the next version of the map data.
on another road nearby. cle icon on the nearest road available.

Revision: 2009 November AV-471 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. <Day/Night> when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press “MAP”.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press “MAP”.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while [at approximately
30 km/h (19 MPH) for about 30 minutes] to
When using tire chains or replacing the tires,
automatically correct the vehicle icon posi-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor
tion.
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect.
If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
Updated road information will be included in
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
the next version of the map data.
in the same area).

RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in If you want to go to that waypoint
the auto reroute calculation. the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.

Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
This is not a malfunction.
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones on the route. If you want to go to 6 or
A waypoint cannot be added.
that you have already passed. more waypoints, perform route calcu-
lations multiple times as necessary.
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis- Divide your trip by selecting one or two
played. The starting point and destination are too far away. intermediate destinations, and per-
form route calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. off.
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting
This is not a malfunction.
have already passed is deleted. point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de-
pending on the area.)
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting of
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
the starting point or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
Reset the destination to a main or or-
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
such as narrow streets (gray roads.)

Revision: 2009 November AV-472 2010 G37 Sedan


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
A
The landmark information does
Updated information will be included
not correspond to the actual in- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
formation.
The suggested route does not B
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destina- tions.
form route calculation.
tion.
C
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution D


Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections
marked with? In some case, voice guidance is not avail- This is not a malfunction.
able even when the vehicle should make a turn. E
Voice guidance is not available Go back to the suggested route or request
The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
Voice guide is set to off. Turn on voice guidance. F
Route guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi-
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
Follow all traffic rules and regulations. G
tion.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-473 2010 G37 Sedan


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621572

CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-411, "Description".
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JPNIA0200ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket LH 3. AV control unit


4. Bracket RH

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621573

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle
specification. For details, refer to AV-411, "Description".
1. Remove display unit. Refer to AV-475, "Exploded View".
2. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be
careful not to insert them wrongly.
• Be sure to perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” when replacing AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 November AV-474 2010 G37 Sedan


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621574

Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T B
models).
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621575

C
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models). D
2. Remove display unit with bracket as a single unit.
INSTALLATION E
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-475 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
FRONT DOOR SQUAWKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621576

JSNIA0114ZZ

1. Door finisher
2. Front door squawker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621577

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove front door squawker from door finisher.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-476 2010 G37 Sedan


FRONT DOOR WOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
FRONT DOOR WOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621578

D
JSNIA0118ZZ

E
1. Front door woofer
2. Woofer bracket
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621579

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove front door woofer from woofer bracket.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-477 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621580

JSNIA0119ZZ

1. Rear door speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621581

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear door speaker from rear door.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-478 2010 G37 Sedan


TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
TWEETER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621582

D
JSNIA0117ZZ

E
1. Tweeter
2. Corner cover inner
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621583

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove front door finisher, and then remove corner cover inner. Refer to INT-12, "Exploded View".
2. Remove tweeter from corner cover inner.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-479 2010 G37 Sedan


CENTER SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
CENTER SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621584

JSNIA0120ZZ

1. Center speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621585

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper grille, and then remove center speaker. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View"
(A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-480 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR WOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
REAR WOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621586

D
JSNIA0121ZZ

E
1. Rear woofer

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621587


F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-20, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove rear woofer from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. H

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-481 2010 G37 Sedan


BOSE AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
BOSE AMP.
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621588

JSNIA0122ZZ

1. BOSE amp.
: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621589

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Exploded View".
2. Remove BOSE amp. from rear parcel shelf.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-482 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ANTENNA AMP.
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621590

D
JSNIA0123ZZ

E
1. AM-FM main connector
2. Antenna amp.
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621591

REMOVAL
G
1. Remove rear pillar finisher LH. Refer to INT-15, "Exploded View".
2. Remove antenna amp. from rear pillar LH.
INSTALLATION H
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-483 2010 G37 Sedan


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621592

JSNIA0124ZZ

1. Satellite radio antenna


: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621593

REMOVAL
1. Remove head lining assembly (rear) to secure work space between vehicle and headlining. Refer to INT-
24, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" (normal roof models) or INT-27, "SUNROOF : Exploded View"
(sunroof models).
2. Remove nut, and then remove satellite radio antenna from roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Satellite radio antenna mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof
panel may be deformed, when satellite radio antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.

Revision: 2009 November AV-484 2010 G37 Sedan


MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621594

REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY C

JSNIA0126ZZ
F

1. Center ventilator grille


2. Multifunction switch G

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621595

H
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models). I
2. Remove multi function switch with center ventilator grille as a single unit.
3. Remove multi function switch from center ventilator.
J
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-485 2010 G37 Sedan


PRESET SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
PRESET SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621596

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T
models).
DISASSEMBLY

JPNIA0201ZZ

1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621597

REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T MOD-
ELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove preset switch screws (A), (B), and (C), and then
remove preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.

1. Clock

JSNIA0127ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.

Revision: 2009 November AV-486 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621598

Refer to ST-17, "Exploded View". B


Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621599

REMOVAL C
Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
D
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-487 2010 G37 Sedan


USB CONNECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
USB CONNECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005656173

JPNIA1789ZZ

1. USB connector

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005656174

REMOVAL
1. Remove center console. Refer to IP-33, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-38, "M/T
MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Push the pawl from the back of center console to remove USB connector.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-488 2010 G37 Sedan


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621606

REMOVAL B
Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C

JSNIA0132ZZ
F
1. Microphone

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621607 G

REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp. Refer to INL-108, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove microphone from map lamp.
INSTALLATION
I
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-489 2010 G37 Sedan


GPS ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
GPS ANTENNA
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621608

JSNIA0175ZZ

1. GPS antenna

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621610

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22, "M/T
MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove GPS antenna (1) from instrument panel.

JSNIA0175ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-490 2010 G37 Sedan


GPS ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000005656631

AV

JSNIA2878GB
P

Revision: 2009 November AV-491 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005621614

REMOVAL
Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY

JSNIA0134ZZ

1. Rear view camera

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005621615

REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher outer. Refer to EXT-41, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear view camera from trunk lid finisher outer.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005621616

Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle,
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust offset of rear view camera” mode of Confirma-
tion / Adjustment mode.

SKIB3691E

Revision: 2009 November AV-492 2010 G37 Sedan


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the A
vehicle.

Selected pattern : −10° to 10° B


4. Make fine adjustment to the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle with up/down/left/right switches so that its position is
aligned with the guiding line. Press “OK” switch and record the C
adjusted guiding line position to the camera control unit.

Up/Down adjustment range : −10° to 10° JSNIA2185ZZ

D
Left/Right adjustment range : −10° to 10°
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.
E

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-493 2010 G37 Sedan


SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005656269

JPNIA1793ZZ

1. Sonar control unit

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005656270

REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument finisher A. Refer to IP-12, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View" (A/T models) or IP-22,
"M/T MODELS : Exploded View" (M/T models).
2. Remove sonar control unit screw, then disconnect sonar control unit connector and remove the sonar
control unit.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2009 November AV-494 2010 G37 Sedan


STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000005688671

REMOVAL B
Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C

JSNIA0135ZZ
F
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
G
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005688672

REMOVAL H
1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
I
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-8, "ADJUST- J
MENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
• Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-29, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRAL
POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description". K

AV

Revision: 2009 November AV-495 2010 G37 Sedan


ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ANTENNA FEEDER
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000005621620

JSNIA2878GB

Revision: 2009 November AV-496 2010 G37 Sedan

You might also like